(0)_29008362R001_HS016 32 64 128_1.0 PS Neo HS2016 128 V1 0 Reference Manual Extended R001 En

User Manual: PS-Neo HS2016-32-64-128 v1-0 Reference-Manual Extended R001 en

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 130 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

PowerSeries Neo Alarm Controller

V1.0 Reference Manual

Models:

HS2016/HS2032/HS2064/HS2128

WARNING: This manual contains information on limitations regarding product use and function and

information on the limitations as to liability of the manufacturer. The entire manual should be carefully

read.

Contents

1: Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

About the System.....................................1

Features............................................................. 1

Available Models .............................................. 1

Compatible Devices.......................................... 2

2: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Overview of Installation Process............3

Alarm Controller Installation ................3

Mounting the Enclosure.................................... 3

Wiring.......................................................3

Terminal Descriptions....................................... 3

Wire Routing for Power & Non-Power Limited4

Corbus Wiring................................................... 4

Installing Modules ...................................5

Zone Expander.................................................. 5

Output Expander............................................... 5

Wireless Transceiver Module ........................... 5

Power Supply Wiring........................................ 5

Keypad Wiring.................................................. 6

Assigning Keypad Zones.................................. 6

Audio Verification Module ............................... 6

Alternate Communicator Wiring ...................... 6

Zone Wiring ...................................................... 6

PGM Wiring...................................................... 7

Bell Wiring........................................................ 7

Telephone Line Wiring ..................................... 8

Smoke Detector Wiring .................................... 8

Fire Zone Wiring: 2-wire Smoke Detectors...... 8

CO Detector ...................................................... 8

Ground Wiring.................................................. 9

Connecting Power............................................. 9

3: Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Basic Configuration Steps.....................10

Using the Keypad...................................10

Special Keys ................................................... 10

LED Indicators................................................ 10

Enrollment..............................................10

Enrolling Modules .......................................... 10

Module Supervision.........................................11

Enroll Wireless Devices...................................11

Working with Partitions .......................11

Setting Up a Partition.......................................11

Bell/Siren Operation ........................................11

Trouble Indicators .................................12

Keypad Partition Setup.........................12

Global Zones................................................... 12

Fire and CO Zone Types................................. 12

Bell/PGM Support .......................................... 12

Communications ............................................. 12

Factory Defaults .............................................. 12

Alternate Communicator Setup........... 12

Real Time Clock.............................................. 13

Communication Paths .....................................13

Communications Options................................ 13

Communication Attempt Limit ....................... 13

Supervision Restore ........................................13

Remote Firmware Upgrade ............................. 13

Local Firmware Upgrade ..................... 13

Testing the System................................. 13

Walk Test.........................................................13

Viewing the Event Buffer................................ 13

4: System Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Arming and Disarming......................... 14

Partition vs. Global Keypad................. 14

Labels ..................................................... 14

System Label...................................................14

Zone Labels.....................................................14

Partition Labels ............................................... 14

Module Labels.................................................14

Event Labels.................................................... 15

Partition Command Output Labels.................. 15

Annunciation ......................................... 15

Door Chime.....................................................15

Temperature Display ....................................... 15

Low Temperature Warning.............................. 15

Keypad Function Keys ......................... 15

Function Key Definitions................................15

Language Selection ............................... 16

[*] Commands ....................................... 16

[*][1] Bypass or Stay/Away/Night Zones ....... 17

[*][2] Trouble Display ....................................17

[*][3] Alarm Memory Display........................ 18

[*][4] Door Chime Enable/Disable ................. 19

[*][5] Program Access Codes ......................... 19

[*][6] User Functions ...................................... 21

[*][7] Command Outputs 1-4.......................... 22

[*][8] Installer Programming .......................... 22

[*][9] No-Entry Arming..................................22

[*][0] Quick Arm/Exit..................................... 22

SMS Command and Control................ 22

SMS Command and Control Functions .......... 22

Visual Verification................................. 23

5: Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

How to Program.................................... 24

Programming Methods......................... 24

Template Programming................................... 24

Contents

DLS Programming.......................................... 24

Installer Programming .................................... 25

Viewing Programming.................................... 25

Programming Hex and Decimal Data............. 25

Programming Descriptions...................26

Adding Labels................................................. 26

Zone Setup ...................................................... 27

System Times.................................................. 30

Access Codes .................................................. 30

PGM Configuration ........................................ 31

PGM Types ..................................................... 31

System Options............................................... 37

Partition Setup ................................................ 42

Reporting ........................................................ 43

System Communications ................................ 46

DLS Programming.......................................... 50

Schedule Programming................................... 52

Wireless Programming.................................... 52

Systems Information....................................... 53

Module Programming..................................... 53

Testing............................................................. 54

Defaults........................................................... 54

6: Programming Worksheets . . . . . . . 55

7: Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Testing.....................................................93

Troubleshooting .....................................93

Appendix A : Event Codes . . . . . . . . . 98

Appendix B : Word Library . . . . . . . 104

Appendix C : Template Programming

Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Appendix D : Regulatory Approvals 110

UL/ULC Installations ....................................111

SIA False Alarm Reduction Installations: Quick

Reference ...........................................................................113

Appendix E : ASCII Characters. . . . 114

Appendix F : Wiring Diagrams . . . . 115

Appendix G : Specifications . . . . . . . 119

Appendix H : Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

xxv

Before Installing The Equipment

Ensure your package includes the following items:

• Installation and User manuals, including the SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.

READ and SAVE these instructions!

Follow all WARNINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS specified within this document and/or on the equipment.

• HS2016/2032/2064/2128 alarm controller

• Power Supply, direct plug-in

•Mounting hardware

Safety Instructions for Service Personnel

Warning: When using equipment connected to the telephone network, always follow the basic safety instructions provided with this product.

Save these instructions for future reference. Inform the end-user of the safety precautions that must be observed when operating this equipment.

Selecting A Suitable Location For The Alarm Controller

Use the following list as a guide to find a suitable location to install this equipment:

• Locate near a telephone socket and power outlet.

• Select a location free from vibration and shock.

• Place alarm controller on a flat, stable surface and follow the installation instructions.

Do NOT locate this product where people may walk on the secondary circuit cable(s).

Do NOT connect alarm controller to electrical the same circuit as large appliances.

Do NOT select a location that exposes your alarm controller to direct sunlight, excessive heat, moisture, vapors, chemicals or dust.

Do not install this equipment near water. (e.g., bath tub, kitchen/laundry sink, wet basement, near a swimming pool).

Do NOT install this equipment and accessories in areas where risk of explosion exists.

Do NOT connect this equipment to electrical outlets controlled by wall switches or automatic timers.

AVOID interference sources.

AVOID installing equipment near heaters, air conditioners, ventilators, and refrigerators.

AVOID locating equipment close to or on top of large metal objects (e.g., wall studs).

• See page 120 for information on locating smoke and CO detectors.

SAFETY Precautions Required During Installation

•NEVER install this equipment and/or telephone wiring during a lightning storm.

•NEVER touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

• Position cables so that accidents can not occur. Connected cables must NOT be subject to excessive mechanical strain.

• Use only the power supply provided with this equipment. Use of unauthorized power supplies may cause damage.

• For direct plug-in versions, use the transformer supplied with the device.

WARNING:

THIS EQUIPMENT HAS NO MAINS ON/OFF SWITCH. THE PLUG OF THE DIRECT PLUG-IN POWER SUPPLY IS INTENDED TO

SERVE AS THE DISCONNECTING DEVICE IF THE EQUIPMENT MUST BE QUICKLY DISCONNECTED. IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT

ACCESS TO THE MAINS PLUG AND ASSOCIATED MAINS SOCKET/OUTLET IS NEVER OBSTRUCTED.

IMPORTANT NOTE!

This alarm system must be installed and used within an environment

that provides the pollution degree max 2 and over-voltages category

II NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS, indoor only. The equipment is

DIRECT PLUG-IN (external transformer) and is designed to be

installed, serviced and/or repaired by service persons only; [service

person is defined as a person having the appropriate technical

training and experience necessary to be aware of hazards to which

that person may be exposed in performing a task and of measures to

minimize the risks to that person or other persons]. There are no

parts replaceable by the end-user within this equipment. The wiring

(cables) used for installation of the alarm system and accessories,

shall be insulated with PVC, TFE, PTFE, FEP, Neoprene or

Polyamide.

(a) The equipment enclosure must be secured to the building

structure before operation.

(b) Internal wiring must be routed in a manner that prevents:

- Excessive strain or loosening of wire on terminal connections;

- Damage of conductor insulation

local waste recovery and recycling regulations.

(d) Before servicing, DISCONNECT the power and telephone

connection.

(e) DO NOT route any wiring over circuit boards.

(f) The installer is responsible to ensure that a readily accessible

disconnect device is incorporated in the building for permanently

connected installations.

The power supply must be Class II, FAIL SAFE with double or reinforced insulation between the PRIMARY and SECONDARY CIRCUIT/

ENCLOSURE and be an approved type acceptable to the local authorities. All national wiring rules must be observed.

Section 1: Introduction

1.1 About the System

The PowerSeries Neo alarm panel is a feature-rich, scalable alarm

system designed for residential and light commercial use. The alarm

panel supports both hardwired and wireless devices. This section lists

the features of the alarm panel, available models, and compatible

devices.

1.1.1 Features

The following features are available on the PowerSeries Neo alarm

controller.

Zones

• 16, 32, 64, or 128 wireless zones supported and 8 hardwired

zones available on the controller

• 40 zone types and 14 programmable zone attributes

• Up to 16 separate wireless keypads supported

• Up to 32 separate wireless keys or panic pendants supported

• Up to 95 separate proximity tags supported

Access Codes

• Up to 98 access codes: one system master code, one installer

code, and one maintenance code

• Programmable attributes for each user code (see page 20)

Programmable Outputs (PGMs)

• Up to 4 programmable outputs (PGM) on the alarm controller

with 41 available options

• 148, 80, 38, 22 maximum programmable outputs

System Supervision Features

• The PowerSeries Neo continuously monitors a number of possi-

ble trouble conditions and provides audible and visual indica-

tion at the keypad. Trouble conditions include:

• AC power failure

• Zone trouble

• Fire trouble

• Telephone line trouble

• Communicator trouble

• Low battery condition

• RF jam

• AUX power supply fault

• Failure to communicate

• Module fault (supervisory or tamper)

Additional Features

• 2-way wireless device support

• Visual verification (images + audio)*

• Proximity tag support

• PGM scheduling

• Quick arming

• User, partition, module, zone and system labels

• Programmable system loop response

• Keypad and panel software versions viewable through keypad

• Doorbell zone type

• Low battery PGM type

1.1.2 Available Models

The following alarm controller models are available:

• HS2016

• HS2032

• HS2064

• HS2128

Model Differences

The table below lists the features of each alarm system model.

Table 1-1 Model Differences

*For UL installations, 2 repeaters must be installed for proper signal

routing.

Features HS2128 HS2064 HS2032 HS2016

Hardwired zones 128 64 32 16

Onboard zone inputs 8 8 8 6

Wireless zones 128 64 32 16

Partitions 8842

Users 95957248

Onboard outputs 4 4 2 2

Max outputs 148 80 38 22

Keypads 16 8 8 8

Wireless keys 32 32 32 16

Wireless sirens 16 8 8 4

Wireless repeaters *8 8 8 4

Proximity tags 94 94 71 47

Alt Comm. phone #’s 4 4 4 4

User-programmable

phone #’s 8888

Lifesafety event buffer 1000 500 500 500

8-zone expander

HSM2108 15 7 3 1

Power supply

HSM2300 4333

Power supply/high-

current output

expander HSM2204

4311

8-output expander

HSM2208 16 8 4 2

2- way wireless inte-

gration module 1111

Audio verification

PC5950 1111

Section 1: Introduction

1.1.3 Compatible Devices

The following wireless devices and modules are compatible with this

alarm controller.

NOTE: On the chart below and throughout this document, x in the

model number represents the operating frequency of the device as fol-

lows: 9 (912-919 MHz), 8 (868MHz), 4 (433MHz).

NOTE: Only models operating in the band 912-919 MHz are UL/ULC

listed where indicated. OnlyUL approved devices are to be used with UL/

ULC listed systems.

Table 1-2 Compatible Devices

Modules

Wireless keypads HS2LCDWFx

HS2LCDWFPx

HS2LCDWFPVx

Hardwired keypads with 2-way wire-

less integration module HS2LCDRFxUL

HS2LCDRFPxUL

HS2ICNRFx UL

HS2ICNRFPxUL

Hardwired keypads HS2LCDUL

HS2LCDPUL

HS2ICNUL

HS2ICNPUL

HS2LEDUL

2-way wireless integration module HSM2HOSTx UL

8-zone expander HSM2108UL

8-output expander HSM2208UL

Power supply HSM2300UL

4 high current output expander HSM2204UL

Alternate communicator 3G2080UL

3G2080RUL

TL280UL

TL280RUL

TL2803GUL

TL2803GRUL

PCL-422UL

Hardwired Devices

2-wire smoke detector

x= A, B, or C

A: ULC listed models

B: UL listed models

C: European and Australian models

FSA-210xUL

FSA-210xTUL

FSA-210xSUL

FSA-210xSTUL

FSA-210xLSTUL

FSA-210xRUL

FSA-210xRTUL

FSA-210xRSUL

FSA-210xRSTUL

FSA-210xLRSTUL

4-wire smoke detector

x= A, B, or C

A: ULC listed models

B: UL listed models

C: European and Australian models

FSA-410xUL

FSA-410xTUL

FSA-410xSUL

FSA-410xSTUL

FSA-410xLSTUL

FSA-410xRUL

FSA-410xRTUL

FSA-410xRSUL

FSA-410xRSTUL

FSA-410xLRSTUL

CO detector CO-12/24UL

12-24SIRUL

FW-CO12UL

FW-CO1224UL

CO1224UL

Wireless Devices

Wireless PG smoke detector PGx926UL

Wireless PG smoke and heat detector PGx916UL

Wireless PG CO detector PGx913UL

Wireless PG PIR motion detector PGx904(P)UL

Wireless PG PIR + camera motion

detector PGx934(P)UL

Wireless PG curtain motion detector PGx924UL

Wireless PG dual tech motion detec-

tor PGx984(P)

Wireless PG mirror motion detector PGx974(P)UL

Wireless PG outdoor motion detector PGx994UL

Wireless PG glass break detector PGx912

Wireless PG shock detector PGx935UL

Wireless PG flood detector PGx985UL

Wireless PG temperature detector

(indoor use) PGx905UL

Outdoor temperature probe (requires

PGx905) PGTEMP-PROBE

Wireless PG key PGx939UL

Wireless PG key PGx929UL

Wireless PG panic key PGx938UL

Wireless PG 2-button key PGx949UL

Wireless PG indoor siren PGx901UL

Wireless PG outdoor siren PGx911UL

Wireless PG repeater PGx920UL

Wireless PG door/window contact PGx975UL

Wireless PG door/window contact w/

AUX PGx945UL

Central Station Receivers

SG-System I, II, III, IV, 5

Enclosures

The HS2128/HS2064/HS2032/HS2016 main board can be installed

in the metal enclosures listed below: Tamper protection switches can

be installed on all enclosures, including door opening protection

and/or removal from the mounting position. Doors can be secured

using screws or keylock.

• Model PC5003C (removable door) made of 22Ga steel, painted,

dimensions: 248mm(L) x 298mm(W) x 76mm(H), weight: 4.5Kg

(with PCB, battery and transformer included)

Section 2: Installation

2.1 Overview of Installation Process

The steps below are provided to assist with the installation of the

alarm system. Read over this section briefly to get an overall under-

standing of the order of installation. Working from this plan can help

reduce problems and reduce the overall time required for installation.

Step 1 – Create a Layout

Draw a rough sketch of the site and include all alarm detection

devices, zone expanders, keypads and other required modules.

Step 2 – Mount the Panel

Decide on a location for the alarm panel and secure it to the wall

using suitable mounting hardware. See 2.2.1 Mounting the Enclosure

on page 3.

Step 3 – Wire the Alarm Controller

Wire each of the modules to the alarm controller following the guide-

lines provided in section 2.3.3 Corbus Wiring on page 4.

Step 4 – Wire Zones

Complete all zone wiring. Follow the guidelines provided in section

2.4.8 Zone Wiring on page 6 to connect zones using normally closed

loops, single EOL resistor, double EOL resistors, fire zones and key-

switch arming zones.

Step 5 – Complete Wiring

Complete all other wiring including bells or sirens, telephone line

connections, ground connections or any other wiring necessary. Fol-

low the guidelines provided in section 2.3.1 Terminal Descriptions

on page 3.

Step 6 – Power up the Control Panel

Once all zone and alarm controller wiring is complete, connect the

battery and power up the system. The alarm controller will not power

up if only the battery is connected.

Step 7 – Enroll Keypads and Modules

All keypads must be enrolled in order to operate on the system. To

enroll the first keypad, see page 11. To enroll optional keypads, see

page 52.

Step 8 – Confirm Module Supervision

By default, all modules are supervised upon installation. Supervision

is enabled at all times. To confirm that each module is properly

supervised, see [903] Confirm Module on page 54.

Step 9 – Enroll Wireless Devices

Wireless devices are enrolled via the wireless transceiver module

(HSM2HOSTx) or RF keypad and Installer Programming section

[804]. See [804] Wireless Programming on page 52 to enroll wireless

devices.

Step 10 – Program the System

Section 5 on page 24 provides a complete description of how to pro-

gram the alarm controller. It contains complete descriptions of the

various programmable features and options. Fill out the program-

ming worksheets starting on page 57 completely before attempting to

program the system.

Step 11 – Test the System

Test the panel completely to ensure that all features and functions

operate as programmed.

2.2 Alarm Controller Installation

Begin the installation by mounting the alarm controller in the metal

enclosure using the stand-offs provided. Optional modules, such as

the HSM2108 and HSM2208, can also be mounted in the enclosure.

Install hardware in the sequence indicated on the following pages.

2.2.1 Mounting the Enclosure

Locate the panel in a dry area, preferably near an unswitched AC

power source and the incoming telephone line. Complete all wiring

before applying AC or connecting the battery.

2.3 Wiring

All wiring entry points on the enclosure are designated by arrows. All

circuits are classified UL power limited except for the battery leads.

Minimum 1/4” (6.4mm) separation must be maintained at all points

between power limited and non-power limited wiring and connections.

2.3.1 Terminal Descriptions

The following terminals are available on the PowerSeries Neo alarm

controller.

Terminal Description

AC Power terminals.

Connect the battery before connecting

the AC. Do not connect the battery or

transformer until all other wiring is

complete.

BAT+, BAT- Battery terminals. Use to provide backup

power and additional current when sys-

tem demands exceed the power output of

the transformer, such as when the system

is in alarm.

Do not connect the battery until all other

wiring is complete.

AUX+, AUX- Auxiliary terminals. Use to power

modules, detectors, relays, LEDs, etc.

(700mA MAX). Connect the positive side

of device to AUX+, the negative side to

AUX-.

BELL+, BELL- Bell/Siren power. Connect the positive

side of any alarm warning device to

BELL+, the negative side to BELL-.

RED, BLK, YEL, GRN Corbus terminals. Use to provide

communication between the alarm

controller and connected modules. Each

module has four Corbus terminals that

must be connected to the Corbus.

PGM1 to PGM4 Programmable output terminals. Use to

activate devices such as LEDs.

(PGM1, PGM3, and PGM4: 50mA

PGM2: 300mA or can be configured as an

input)

Z1 to Z8

COM

Zone input terminals. Ideally, each zone

should have one detection device; how-

ever, multiple detection devices can be

wired to the same zone.

TIP, RING, T-1, R-1 Telephone line terminals.

EGND Earth ground connection.

PCLINK_1 DLS/SA

PCLINK_2 DLS/SA, Alternate Communicator

Section 2: Installation

2.3.2 Wire Routing for Power & Non-Power

Limited

All wiring entry points are designated on the diagram by arrows. All

circuits are classified UL installation power limited except for the

battery leads which are not power limited.

A minimum ¼” (6.4mm) separation must be maintained at all points

between power limited and non-power limited wiring and connec-

tions. See page 115 for expanded diagrams.

Diagram 2-1: Wiring Routing

NOTE: Wire entry for power limited wiring must be separated by a dif-

ferent entry access from non-power limited wiring.

2.3.3 Corbus Wiring

The RED and BLK Corbus terminals are used to provide power

while YEL and GRN are used for data communications. The 4 Cor-

bus terminals of the alarm controller must be connected to the 4 Cor-

bus terminals or wires of each module.

The following conditions apply:

• Corbus should be run with minimum 22 gauge quad. two pair

twisted preferred.

• The modules can be home run to the panel, connected in series

or can be T-tapped.

NOTE: Any module can be connected anywhere along the Corbus. Sep-

arate wire runs for keypads, zone expanders etc. are not necessary.

NOTE: No module can be more than 1,000'/305m (in wire length) from

the panel. Do not use shielded wire for Corbus wiring.

Diagram 2-2: Corbus Wiring

Module (A) is wired correctly as it is

within 1,000'/305m of the panel, in

wire distance. Module (B) is wired

correctly as it is within 1,000'/305m

of the panel, in wire distance. Module

farther than 1,000'/305m from the

panel.

Current Ratings

In order for the system to operate properly, the power output of the

alarm controller and power supply modules cannot be exceeded. Use

the data below to ensure that the available current is not exceeded.

Table 2-1: System Output Ratings

Alarm Controller Current Calculation

Maximum (Standby or Alarm)

***See Corbus Current Calculation Chart.

For UL, ULC and Commercial Listed applications, the total standby and

alarm current cannot exceed 700mA.

*These units draw current from the Corbus to power devices external

to the module. This current must be added to the total Corbus current.

See manufacturer's specifications for the current draw of each device.

PC Boar d

Cabinet

Stand Of f

Primary:120V AC/60Hz.

Secondary: 16.5VDC 40V A

DSCPTD 1640U

Class II Transf ormer

NOTE: Do not connect

transformer to receptacle

controlled by a switch

CON1

BAT+BA T-

POWER LIMITED

NON-POWER LIMITED DSC Model BD7-12

or equivalent

Battery

StandbyTime:

24Hrs min.

BLACK

RED

TB-2

AUX

BELL

DSC

UA 50 3

Cable Tie (not supplied) recommended

HS2016-4

HS2064

HS2128

Only

HS2016-4

HS2032

HS2064

HS2128

Only

HS2016/032/064/128

High Voltage . Disconnect AC Power

and telephone lines before servicing

WARNING:

12V / 7 AHr 12V / 7 AHr

North America Only

-BLK

RED YEL GRN

PGM

COM COM COM

COM

Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 Z8 GND Tip

Ring R-1

T-1

PE (Protective Earth)

Device Output Rating (12VDC)

HS2016

HS2032

HS2064

HS2128

AUX: 700mA. Subtract the listed rating for each

keypad, expansion module and accessory

connected to AUX or Corbus. At least

100mA must be reserved for the Corbus.

BELL: 700mA. continuous rating.

2.0A. short term. Available only with

standby battery connected. Not for UL/

ULC or EN certified applications

HSM2208 AUX: 250mA.Continuous rating. Subtract for

each device connected. Subtract the total

load on this terminal from the alarm panel

AUX/Corbus output.

HSM2108 AUX: 100mA. Subtract for each device

connected. Subtract the total load on this

terminal from the panel AUX/Corbus

output.

AUX (700mA max. including

PGMs 1-4)

Corbus (700mA max.)***

PCLink+ (Alt. Com.:125mA)

Total (must not exceed 700mA)

Table 2-2:Corbus Current Calculation Chart

Item Current (mA) x Quantity Total (mA)

HS2LCD 100 x

HS2ICN 100 x

HS2LED 100 x

HS2LCDP 100 x

HS2ICNP 100 x

HS2LCDRF 100 x

HS2ICNRF 100 x

HS2ICNRFP 100 x

Current required for connected devices =

HSM2108* 30 x

HSM2208* 40 x

HSM2300/2204* 35 x

HSM2HOSTx 35 x

3G2080(R)/

TL2803G(R)/

TL280(R)

125 (PCLINK) x

Total Corbus Current =

Section 2: Installation

Line Loss

Voltage loss through wire resistance must be considered for all instal-

lations. To ensure proper operation, at least 12.5VDC must be applied

to all modules on the system (when AC is connected and the battery

is fully charged). If less than 12.5VDC is applied, system operation is

adversely affected.

To correct the problem, try any or all of the following:

1. Connect an HSM2300/2204 power supply between the alarm

controller and the module to provide power to the Corbus.

2. Reduce the length of the Corbus run to the module.

3. Increase the gauge of wire.

Capacitance Limits

An increase in capacitance on the Corbus affects data transmission

and causes the system to slow down. Capacitance increases for every

foot of wire added to the Corbus. The capacitance rating of the wire

used will determine the maximum length of the Corbus.

For example, 22-gauge, non-shielded, 4-conductor wire has a typical

capacitance rating of 20 picofarads per foot (which is 20nF/1000’).

For every 1000' of wire added – regardless of where it is run – the

capacitance of the Corbus increases by 20nF.

The following chart indicates the total wire distance allowed for the

capacitance rating of the wire used:

Table 2-3: Wire Capacitance

2.4 Installing Modules

Remove all power from the system while connecting modules to the

alarm controller.

2.4.1 Zone Expander

The main alarm controller has connection terminals for zones 1 to 8.

Additional HSM2108 zone expanders may be added to increase the

number of zones on the system. Each zone expander consists of one

group of 8 zones. At enrollment, the zone expander is automatically

assigned to the next available zone slot. Connect the RED, BLK,

YEL and GRN terminals to the Corbus terminals on the alarm panel.

Board current draw: 30mA.

Diagram 2-3: HSM2108 Zone Expander

Refer to the HSM2108 installation sheet for more information.

2.4.2 Output Expander

The HSM2208 module is used to add up to 8 low-current programmable

outputs to the alarm system.

The 4-wire Corbus connection is used by the panel to communicate with

the module. Connect the RED, BLK, YEL and GRN terminals to the

Corbus terminals on the alarm panel. Board current draw: 40mA.

Diagram 2-4: HSM2208 Output Expander

2.4.3 Wireless Transceiver Module

The HSM2HOSTx 2-way wireless integration module provides com-

munication between wireless devices and the alarm controller.

Connect the HSM2HOSTx to the 4-wire Corbus of the alarm control-

ler according to the diagram below.

Diagram 2-5: HSM2HOSTx Wiring Diagram

After you have completed the wiring, reconnect power to the security

system. Board currant draw: 35mA

2.4.4 Power Supply Wiring

The HSM2300/2204 power supply/high-current output module pro-

vides up to 1.0A of additional current and can be used to add up to

four programmable outputs (HSM2204 only) to the alarm system.

The 4-wire Corbus connection provides communication between the

module and alarm panel. Connect the RED, BLK, YEL & GRN ter-

minals to the RED, BLK, YEL & GRN Corbus terminals on the

alarm controller. If O1 is not used, connect to Aux with a 1K resistor.

Board current draw: 1.2A.

Diagram 2-6: Power Supply Wiring

Wire Capacitance per 1000’

(300m) Total Corbus Wire Length

15nF 5300’/1616m

20nF 4000’/1220m

25nF 3200’/976m

30nF 2666’/810m

35nF 2280’/693m

40nF 2000’/608m

SERIAL NUMBER

LED

SWITCH

SERIAL NUMBER

LED

SWITCH

CORBUS TO

HSM2HOST

AUX**

EXPANSION

MODULE

KEYBUS

CONNECTION

TO CONTROL

PANEL

RED

BLK

YEL

GRN

RED*

BLK*

YEL

GRN

Battery standby capacity is at least for 24 hours for Fire

Applications.

Recommended Battery: DSC model BD7-12.

* Red, Blk, 12 V

@ 20mA

** Refer to the Specications Chart above for

the maximum current draw.

BATTERY

12V 7Ah

Maximum battery

charge current is

360 mA

BATTERY 1

12V 7Ah

Maximum battery

charge current is

360 mA

Residential

Burglary

TRANSFORMER

16.5V

/ 40VA

PTD1640U /

PTD1640

BLK

BATTERY 2

12V 7Ah

Same rating as

Battery 1

CON1

BAT+ BAT-

120VAC/

60Hz

Primary

EU, South Africa,

Australia, NZ etc:

primary 230VAC/ 50/60Hz

Section 2: Installation

2.4.5 Keypad Wiring

To wire a keypad to the alarm controller, remove the keypad back-

plate (refer to the keypad installation sheet) and connect the R, B, Y,

and G terminals to the corresponding terminals on the alarm control-

ler.

Keypad Zone/PGM Wiring

Hardwired devices can be connected to hardwired keypads with

inputs (zone) or outputs (PGM). This saves from running wires back

to the control panel for every device.

To connect a zone device to HS2LCD, HS2ICON and HS2LED key-

pads, run one wire to the P/Z terminal and the other to B. For pow-

ered devices, use red and black to supply power to the device. Run

the red wire to the R (positive) terminal and the black wire to the B

(negative) terminal.

Keypad zones support Normally Closed Loops, Single End of Line

and Double End of Line.

To connect the PGM output, run one wire to the P terminal and the

other to R.

Diagram 2-7: Keypad P/Z Terminals

NOTE: When using end of line supervision, connect the zone according

to one of the configurations outlined in Section 2.4.8.. End of line resis-

tors must be placed on the device end of the loop, not at the keypad.

Assigning Keypad Zones

When using keypad zone inputs, each input used must be assigned a

zone number in Installer Programming.

First, ensure that you have enrolled all installed keypads into the

desired slots (See “[902] Add/Remove Modules” on page 53). Next,

assign keypad zones by entering programming section [861]-[876],

subsection 011 for keypads 1-16. Enter a 3-digit zone number for

each of the keypad zones. This number must be programmed into the

slot location that the keypad is assigned to.

NOTE: If a keypad zone input is assigned to zone number 1 to 8, the

corresponding zone cannot be used on the main control panel.

Once the keypad zones are assigned, you must also program zone

definitions and zone attributes. See “[001] Zone Type” on page 27

and [002] Zone Attributes on page 29.

2.4.6 Audio Verification Module

(Non-UL listed systems only)

The PC5950 Universal VOX Audio Verification module provides

“talk/listen-in” capability for audio verification of alarms. The mod-

ule permits the central station to monitor microphones and communi-

cate to occupants through speakers. The following diagram illustrates

how to wire the PC5950 to the alarm control panel and listening sta-

tions.

Diagram 2-8: PC5950 Wiring Diagram

2.4.7 Alternate Communicator Wiring

See Alternate Communicator installation manual.

2.4.8 Zone Wiring

Power down the alarm controller and complete all zone wiring.

Zones can be wired to supervise normally open devices (e.g., smoke

detectors) or normally closed devices (e.g., door contacts). The alarm

panel can also be programmed for single end-of-line or double end-

of-line resistors.

Zone programming is done using the following programming sec-

tions:

• [001] selects zone definition

• [013] Opt [1] for normally closed or EOL; Opt [2] for SEOL or

DEOL

Observe the following guidelines when wiring zones:

• For UL listed installations use SEOL or DEOL only

• Minimum 22 AWG wire, maximum 18 AWG

• Do not use shielded wire

• Do not exceed 100 wire resistance. Refer to the chart below:

Table 2-4: Burglary Zone Wiring Chart

RED

BLK

YEL

GRN

To zone or

PGM output

Wire

Gauge

Maximum Length to

EOL Resistor (ft/meters)

22 3000 / 914

20 4900 / 1493

19 6200 / 1889

18 7800 / 2377

Figures are based on maximum wiring resistance of 100

B Universal Conguration Wiring Diagram

(Positive Bell Drive from Panel)

Mic Spkr

Audio

Station

Aux

Com

Mic Spkr

Audio

Station

Aux

Com

Mic Spkr

Audio

Station

Aux

Com

Mic Spkr

Audio

Station

Aux

Com

AUX

COM

ZONE

+ BELL-

1 2

PGM

SIREN

EOLR

*Panel

PC5950

To outside

phone line

Bell (Siren)

SIREN / EOLR

RM1 / RM1C

*NOTE: Connections may vary

depending on conguration

M1 M2 M3 M4

RED BLK YEL GRN TAM

AUX

SPK2SPK1 COM

OFF

RNG

TIP

R-1

T-1

+ -

BELL

Trg/

Enb Enb

NOTE$Q5050&UHOD\

LVUHTXLUHGLQRUGHUWR

VXSSUHVV%HOO7URXEOH

LQGLFDWLRQ%HOO7URXEOHZLOO

RFFXULIDXGLRVHVVLRQLV

ORQJHUWKDQ%HOO7LPHRXW

,IQRVLUHQLVUHTXLUHG

UHSODFHVLUHQ(2/5ZLWKD

2KP:UHVLVWRU

Section 2: Installation

Normally Open and Normally Closed

Connect hardwired devices to any Z terminal and any Com terminal.

Wire normally closed devices in series and normally open devices in

parallel.

NOTE: For UL Installations, do not use normally closed loops.

Diagram 2-9: Normally Closed

The following chart shows zone status under certain conditions for

NC Loops:

Table 2-5: NC Loop Status

Single End-of-Line (SEOL) Resistor

When SEOL resistors are installed at the end of a zone loop, the

alarm panel detects if the circuit is secure, open, or shorted. The

SEOL resistor must be installed at the end of the loop for proper

supervision.

To enable SEOL supervision, program section [013], options [1] and

[2] to OFF.

NOTE: This option should be selected if either normally closed or nor-

mally open detection devices or contacts are used.

Diagram 2-10: SEOL Wiring

The following chart shows zone status under certain conditions for

SEOL:

Table 2-6: SEOL Loop Status

Double End of Line (DEOL) Resistors

When double end-of-line (DEOL) resistors are installed at the end of

a zone loop, The second resistor enables the panel to determine if the

zone is in alarm, tampered or faulted.

NOTE: Any zone programmed for Fire or 24-hr Supervisory must be

wired with a SEOL resistor regardless of the type of zone wiring supervi-

sion selected for the panel. If you change the zone supervision options

from DEOL to SEOL or from NC to DEOL, power the system down

completely, then power it back up for correct operation.

To enable DEOL supervision, program section [013], option [1] to

OFF and option [2] to ON.

Diagram 2-11: DEOL Wiring

NOTE: If the DEOL supervision option is enabled, all hardwired zones

must be wired for DEOL resistors, except for Fire and 24 Hour Supervi-

sory zones. Do not use DEOL resistors for Fire zones or 24 Hour Super-

visory zones.

NOTE: Do not wire Fire zones to keypad zone terminals if the DEOL

supervision option is selected.

NOTE: This option can only be selected if NC detection devices or con-

tacts are used. Only one NC contact can be connected to each zone.

The following chart shows zone status under certain conditions for

DEOL:

Table 2-7: DEOL Loop Status

2.4.9 PGM Wiring

Min/max operating voltages for devices, sensors and modules is

9.5VDC - 14VDC.

PGMs switch to ground when activated from the alarm controller.

Connect the positive side of the device to the AUX+ terminal and the

negative side to a PGM terminal.

PGM 1, 3, 4 supply up to 50mA; PGM 2 supplies up to 300mA.

A relay is required for current levels greater than 50mA or 300mA.

PGM2 can also be used for 2-wire smoke detectors.

NOTE: Use SEOL resistors on Fire zones only.

Diagram 2-12: LED Output With Current Limiting Resistor and

Optional Relay Driver Output.

UL Compatibility ID For FSA-210B Series is: FS200

NOTE: For ULC listed installations, use FSA-210A and FSA-410A

series.

2.4.10 Bell Wiring

These terminals supply 700mA of current at 10.4 - 12.5VDC for

commercial/ residential installations. To comply with NFPA 72 Tem-

poral Three Pattern requirements, section [013] Opt [8] must be ON.

Note that steady, pulsed alarms are also supported.

Diagram 2-13: Bell Wiring

Loop Resistance Loop Status

0 (shorted wire, loop shorted) Secure

Infinite (broken wire, loop open) Violated

Loop Resistance Loop Status

0 (shorted wire, loop shorted) Violated

5600 (contact closed) Secure

Infinite (broken wire, loop open) Violated

ANY Z

TERMINAL ANY COM

TERMINAL

ANY Z

TERMINAL ANY COM

TERMINAL

Loop Resistance Loop Status

0 (shorted wire, loop shorted) Fault

5600 (contact closed) Secure

Infinite (broken wire, loop open) Tamper

11200 (contact open) Violated

Section 2: Installation

The Bell output is supervised and power limited by 2A PTC. If

unused, connect a 1000 resistor across Bell+ and Bell- to prevent

the panel from displaying a trouble. See [*][2] on page 17.

2.4.11 Telephone Line Wiring

Wire the telephone connection terminals (TIP, Ring, T-1, R-1) to an

RJ-31x connector as indicated in the following diagram. For connec-

tion of multiple devices to the telephone line, wire in the sequence

indicated. Use 26 AWG wire minimum for wiring.

Diagram 2-14: Telephone Line Wiring

NOTE: Ensure that all plugs and jacks meet the dimension, tolerance

and metallic plating requirements of 47 C.F.R. Part 68, Sub-Part F. For

proper operation, no other telephone equipment must be connected

between the control panel and the telephone company facilities.

2.4.12 Smoke Detector Wiring

All zones defined as Fire must be wired according to the following

diagram:

Diagram 2-15: Smoke Detector Wiring

See “[001] Zone Type” on page 27 for fire zone operation.

NOTE: Smoke detectors must be latching type. To reset a smoke detec-

tor, enter [*][7][2].

Table 2-8: Compatible 4-Wire Smoke Detectors

Fire Zone Wiring: 2-wire Smoke Detectors

If PGM 2 is programmed for 2-wire smoke detector connection, the

detectors must be wired according to the following diagram:

Diagram 2-16: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Wiring

NOTE: The maximum number of smoke detectors on a 2-wire loop is

18. For more information on Fire zones, see section [001] Zone Type on

page 27.

NOTE: Do not combine smoke detector models from different manu-

facturers on the same circuit. Operation may be impaired. Refer to the

smoke detector installation sheet when positioning detectors.

Table 2-9: Compatible 2-Wire Smoke Detectors

Table 2-10: 2-Wire Smoke Detector Initiating Circuit

2.4.13 CO Detector

The following hardwired CO detector models can be used with Pow-

erSeries Neo alarm controllers:

• Potter Model CO-12/24, UL File E321434

• Quantum Model 12-24SIR, UL File E186246

• NAPCO Model FW-CO12 or FW-CO1224, UL File E306780

• System Sensor Model CO1224, UL File E307195

NOTE: For multiple unit connections, the leads between CO detectors

must be broken. The power supervision relay must be powered from the

last detector in the loop.

Wireless CO detectors are also available. When installing wireless

CO detectors, use only model PG9913UL, PG8913, PG4913. An

HSM2HOSTx (x=9UL/8/4) wireless receiver or HS2LCDRF(P)x/

HS2ICNRF(P)x (x=9UL/8/4) wireless keypad are required when

installing wireless CO detectors. For more details on these wireless

devices, refer to their respective installation manuals.

NOTE: Use only UL approved devices with UL/ULC listed systems.

Table 2-11: CO Detector Ratings

Diagram 2-17: CO Detector Wiring

FSA-410B FSA-410BLST FSA-410BRST

FSA-410BT FSA-410BR FSA-410BLRST

FSA-410BS FSA-410BRT

FSA-410BST FSA-410BRS

Current ratings for DSC FSA-410 Series: 25mA

T-1

R-1

TIP

RING RJ-31X

RED

GRN

BRN

GRA

To alarm

initiating

circuit

NO C N C

P ane l

EOLR

RM-2

1 PGM 2

COM

+ AUX -

V+

ZONE

Additional 2-wire smoke detectors must be

connected in parallel as shown above.

FSA-210B FSA-210BLST FSA-210BRST

FSA-210BT FSA-210BR FSA-210BLRST

FSA-210BS FSA-210BRT

FSA-210BST FSA-210BRS

Current ratings for DSC FSA-210B series: 35mA

Item Specification

Style/Class, Supervised, Power Limited Style B (Class B)

Compatibility Identifier HS2-1

DC Output Voltage 9.7-13.8 VDC

Detector Load 2mA (MAX)

Single End of Line Resistor (SEOL) 2200

Loop Resistance 24 (MAX)

Standby Impedance 3000 (NOM)

Alarm Impedance 1200 (MAX)

Alarm Current 86mA (MAX)

Device Description Max Rating @12VDC

CO-12/24 Potter model CO detector 40mA

12-24SIR Quantum model CO detector 75mA

FW-CO12

FW-CO1224

NAPCO model CO detector 90mA

CO DETECTOR

RM-1/RM-2

POWER LOOP

SUPERVISORY

RELAY

(12V

, 35mA)

ALARM

INITIATING

LOOP

RESISTANCE

100 ohm

SEOL

RESISTOR

(5600 ohm)

HS2016/HS2032/HS2064/HS2128

ANY

COM

ZONE

INPUT

POWER ALARM TROUBLE

NC C NO NC C NO

ANY

(SEOL TYPE 41)

AUX

Section 2: Installation

2.4.14 Ground Wiring

NOTE: Using an insulated green wire (minimum 22AWG), connect the

EGND terminal on the Corbus and the grounding wire from the building

electrical installation to any of the available holes on the back or side of

the metal cabinet. See the diagram attached to the cabinet for suggested

GND point location and hardware recommendations.

NOTE: Wire and installation hardware not included.

Diagram 2-18: Ground Installation

2.4.15 Connecting Power

The alarm controller requires a 16.5V, 40VA transformer. While

unplugged, connect the transformer to the AC terminals on the con-

troller. The alarm controller can be programmed to accept a power

line frequency of either 50Hz AC or 60Hz AC. See programming

section [024], option [1].

NOTE: For UL/ULC installations use only 60Hz.For ULC S559 appli-

cations, Standex transformer (Model FTC3716) shall be employed for

direct-wiring.

AC (UL Listed Installations)

Primary: 120VAC/60Hz./0.33A

Secondary: 16.5VAC/40VA DSC PTD1640U, DSC PTC1640U Class

2 transformer.

NOTE: Use DSC PTD1640 for Canadian installations.

WARNING:: Do not connect the battery or transformer until all other wir-

ing is complete.

Batteries

Do not connect the battery until all other wiring is complete.

NOTE: A sealed, rechargeable, lead acid battery or gel type battery is

required to meet UL requirements for power standby times.

Connect the RED battery lead to the positive battery terminal and the

BLACK battery lead to the negative battery terminal.

The panel can be programmed to charge the battery at 400mA or

700mA. (See “[982] Battery Settings” on page 54).

NOTE: Refer to Aux Loading and Battery Selection on page 112.

Battery Selection Charts

Use the following chart to determine the battery required to support

the main panel for either 4 hours or 24 hours in the standby mode.

The battery size is measured in amp hours (Ah).

Table 2-12: Standby Battery Guide

* with high current battery charge option enabled: [982] bit 1.

NOTE: Battery capacity deteriorates with age and the number of charge/

discharge cycles. Replace every 3-5 years.

Refer to Appendix D: Regulatory Approvals on page 110 for detailed

Aux. loading and battery charging information.

Battery Charging Current: 400mA/700mA*

Battery Size Standby

4Hr 24Hr

4Ahr 700mA ----

7Ahr 700mA 180mA

14Ahr 700mA 470mA

Tighten nut to break paint and make

good connection to the cabinet

Section 3: Configuration

3.1 Basic Configuration Steps

Once basic installation of the alarm panel is complete, the following

general configuration options should be set:

• create partitions, page 11

• assign keypads to partitions, page 12

• assign sirens to partitions, page 11

• create global zones, page 12

• set up partition account codes, page 12

• set up partition timers, page 30

• enroll wireless modules and devices, page 10

• assign zone types, page 27, and attributes, page 29

• create zone labels, page 26

• add users, page 19

• set up the alternate communicator if equipped, page 12

• program phone numbers, page 46

• set up call directions for the central monitoring station, page 47

• set up system timers, page 30

• configure reporting codes, page 43

• test the system, page 13

3.2 Using the Keypad

The PowerSeries Neo alarm panel is compatible with several differ-

ent keypad types (see 1.1.3 Compatible Devices on page 2); How-

ever, all keypads have certain basic functionality in common.

3.2.1 Special Keys

Scroll symbols < > on keypads with LCD displays indicate that

options can be viewed by pressing the scroll keys. These

keys can also be used to position the cursor.

The key is similar in function to the “Enter” key on a personal

computer. It is generally used to accept the existing programming

option. It is also the first key entry for [*] commands and can be used

to enter the letters A-F when in Installer Programming mode.

The key is similar in function to the “ESC” (escape) key on a

personal computer. It is generally used to exit the current program-

ming section or to return to the previous one.

3.2.2 LED Indicators

Keypads have the following status lights that provide visual indica-

tion of basic system status:

Panel Status LED Operation

The red status LED, located on the alarm controller PCB, indicates

the following:

• Power up sequence – flashes rapidly until the end of the power-

up sequence.

• Firmware indication – flashes during the firmware upgrade pro-

cess. If the firmware upgrade fails, the LED flashes rapidly.

• Trouble indication – Flashes when troubles are present. Trou-

bles are indicated according to the following priority:

1 flash - no keypads enrolled

2 flashes - module supervision trouble

3 flashes - bus low voltage

4 flashes - battery trouble

5 flashes - AC trouble

6 flashes - AUX trouble

7 flashes - bell trouble

8 flashes - TLM trouble

How to Enter Data

Conventions Used In This Manual

Brackets [ ] indicate numbers or symbols that must be entered on the

keypad.

e.g., [*][8][Installer Code][898] requires the following key entries:

[*] initiates a special command.

[5555] is the default installer code. The default installer code should

be changed during initial programming of the system.

[898] indicates the particular programming section being accessed.

Entering Letters Manually

1. In Installer Programming, enter the section requiring text input

(usually a system label).

2. Use the arrow keys [<][>] to move the cursor to a blank space or

existing character.

3. Press the number key corresponding to the appropriate letter.

Each number button accesses three letters and a number. The

first press of the number key displays the first letter. The second

press displays the second letter, etc.

4. To select lower case letters press [*]. The Select Options list

opens. Scroll to “lower case” and press [*] again to select.

5. When the required letter or number is displayed use the arrow

keys [<][>] to scroll to the next letter.

6. When finished, press the [*] key, use the [<][>] keys to scroll to

“Save” then press [*].

7. Continue from step 2 until all labels are programmed.

For information on entering hexadecimal data, see Programming Hex

and Decimal Data on page 25.

3.3 Enrollment

All optional modules and devices must be enrolled on the system.

During enrollment, the electronic serial number (ESN) of each device

is identified to the control panel and zones are assigned. A wireless

transceiver HSM2HOST or an RF keypad must be enrolled first

before wireless devices can be enrolled.

3.3.1 Enrolling Modules

During automatic and manual enrollment, if an attempt is made to

enroll more than the maximum number of modules, an error tone

sounds and a message is displayed on LCD keypads.

Ready: Panel is ready to be armed.

Armed: Panel is armed.

Trouble: System trouble. Enter [][2] to view troubles.

AC Power: ON=AC present. OFF=AC absent.

A, B, C, 1

D, E, F, 2

G, H, I, 3

J, K, L, 4

M, N, O, 5

P, Q , R , 6

S, T, U, 7

V, W, X, 8

Y, Z , 9 , 0

Space

Section 3: Configuration

Table 3-1 Module Capacity

Modules can be enrolled automatically or manually using section

[902] of Installer programming. For instructions on enrolling mod-

ules, see page 53.

To confirm that a module has been successfully enrolled, use Installer

Programming section [903]. See page 54 for details.

Enrolling the First Keypad

To enroll a hardwired keypad, connect the keypad to the alarm con-

troller, power up the alarm panel then press any button on the keypad.

To enroll a wireless keypad, first connect the HSM2HOSTx wireless

integration module (or RF keypad) to the alarm controller. Next,

power up the alarm panel and a wireless keypad. Press any button on

the keypad to enroll it on the HSM2HOSTx. The HSM2HOSTx is

then enrolled on the alarm panel. To enroll other keypads, see

page 53.

3.3.2 Module Supervision

By default, all modules are supervised upon installation. Supervision

is enabled at all times so that the panel can indicate a trouble if a

module is removed from the system.

To check which modules are currently connected and supervised, see

[903] Confirm Module on page 54.

If a module is connected but is not recognized by the system, it may

be due to any of the following reasons:

• the module is incorrectly wired to the alarm controller

• the module has exceeded its maximum wire run length

• the module does not have enough power

• the module is not enrolled on the wireless receiver

Removing Modules

Enrolled modules can be deleted from the system via programming

section [902]. For instructions, see [902] Add/Remove Modules on

page 53.

3.3.3 Enroll Wireless Devices

Wireless devices are enrolled via the wireless transceiver module and

Installer Programming section [804][000]. See “Compatible

Devices” on page 2. for a list of supported wireless devices.

Wireless devices are enrolled using one of the following methods:

Auto Enrollment

To enroll a wireless device using this method, press and hold the

Enroll button on the device for 2-5 seconds until the LED lights then

release the button. The alarm panel automatically recognizes the

device and the keypad displays a confirmation message. The device

ID and next available zone number are displayed. Press [*] to accept

or scroll to another available zone number. Batteries must be

installed in the wireless device in order to enroll.

Various zone features are programmable depending on the type of

device. Refer to page 27 for details.

Pre-Enrollment

Pre-enrollment is a two step process. The first step requires entering

each device ID ([804][001]-[716]). Every wireless device has an ID

printed on the sticker attached to the device. The format is XXX-

YYYY where:

• XXX identifies the type or model of the device

• YYYY is a short encrypted ID used by the system to identify the

specific device

Pre-enrollment can be done at a remote location and using DLS/SA.

The second step is to press the enrollment button on the device, usu-

ally done on location. Installer Programming does not have to be

entered at this step. Both steps must be performed in order to com-

plete the enrollment.

3.4 Working with Partitions

A partition is a limited area of the premises that operates inde-

pendently from the other areas. Partitioning a system can be benefi-

cial if the property has outbuildings that need to be secured

independently of a main area or if the home has a separate apartment.

Each partition can have it's own keypad or a keypad can have access

to all partitions (only if all partitions belong to the same owner). User

access to partitions is controlled via access codes. A master code can

access the entire system and partitions, while a user code is limited to

assigned partitions.

Setting up a partition requires configuration of the following:

• create the partition

• define bell/siren operation

• assign keypads

• assign zones

• assign users

3.4.1 Setting Up a Partition

Partitions are added or removed from the system by applying or

removing a partition mask via Installer Programming section [200].

The number of available partitions depends on the alarm panel

model. See [200] Partition Mask on page 42 for more information.

3.4.2 Bell/Siren Operation

Each partition must have a siren. The system siren connected to the

bell output of the alarm controller can be mounted in a central loca-

tion within hearing range of all partitions. Each partition can also

have wireless sirens activated only on the assigned partition. See

Wireless Programming on page 52 for details.

Single Siren Output Operation

With a siren shared across all partitions, control over activation/deac-

tivation of the output depends on the partition that initiated the alarm

sequence. Only the partition that originated the alarm can deactivate

the bell output.

Global zones, such as smoke detectors shared by multiple partitions,

can deactivate the siren on all partitions the zone is assigned to.

Bell Timeout

Each partition has a dedicated maximum bell activation time, pro-

grammable in minutes, to enable activation or deactivation of the

siren according to events occurring on the partition(s). See System

Times on page 30 for more information.

Fire Pre-Alerts

Smoke detector zones should be enrolled on all partitions. If a smoke

detector zone assigned to only one partition activates, the only way to

silence the delayed fire pre-alert is by pressing a key on a keypad

assigned to that partition. If the smoke detector zone is assigned to all

partitions, pressing a key on any keypad silences the pre-alert.

Multiple Siren Output Operation

When multiple sirens are used in the installation, they can be pro-

grammed to sound alarm conditions for all partitions, or for individ-

ual partitions by using a partition enable mask.

If hardwired sirens are used, this is accomplished via bus power sup-

plies with a supervised high-current output. The output is then pro-

grammed as a Fire and Burglary PGM output type.

Module HS2016 HS2032 HS2064 HS2128

HSM2108 8 Zone expander 23715

HSM2208 8 Output expander 24816

Wireless Keypad:

HS2LCDRF(P)4

HS2ICNRF(P)4

HS2LCDWF(P)(V)4

88816

HSM2300 Power Supply 1A 3334

HSM2204 4 High-current

Output

1134

HSM2HOSTx Transceiver1111

PC5950 Audio Verification

(not UL evaluated)

1111

Section 3: Configuration

NOTE: Only the first output of the HSM2204 output module has bell

supervision. Some conditions, such as an installer system test, may over-

ride the partition assignment and cause all sirens to activate. User system

tests only activate the sirens/outputs assigned to that partition.

3.5 Trouble Indicators

Both audible and visual trouble indications are available on all parti-

tions. For more information, see [*][2] Trouble Display on page 17.

Programming section [013] option 3 controls whether or not troubles

are indicated when the alarm system is armed.

3.6 Keypad Partition Setup

Keypads can be configured to control an individual partition or all

partitions. In general, a partition keypad controls the partition it is

assigned to. A Global keypad controls all partitions. Global keypads

should be placed in common areas of the premises, such as points of

entry or reception areas, where the ability to arm and disarm more

than one partition at a time is required.

Partition keypads can also be temporarily loaned to other partitions.

To select a keypad operating mode:

1. Enter Installer Programming: [*][8][installer code].

2. Select [861]-[876] to program keypads 1-16.

3. Press [000] for partition assignment.

• For Global operation, key in 00.

• To assign a keypad to a partition, key in 01-08 for parti-

tion 1-8.

4. Press the [#] key twice to exit programming.

Continue this procedure at each keypad until all have been

assigned to the correct partition.

Users are assigned partition access rights via the [*][5] menu.

Loaned Partition Setup

To loan a keypad to another partition:

1. Press and hold [#]. The keypad switches to Global display.

2. Select a partition by pressing digits 1 to 8. The keypad is tempo-

rarily loaned to another partition.

If the keypad is inactive for more than 30 seconds, it reverts to

its assigned partition.

3.6.1 Global Zones

If a zone is added to more than one partition, it becomes a global

zone. A global zone is only armed when all assigned partitions are

armed and is disarmed when any assigned partition is disarmed.

Global zones behave as follows:

• A global Stay/Away type zone is not activated until all partitions

the zone is assigned to are armed in the Away mode. Interiors

must be activated on all partitions for the global Stay/Away zone

to be active.

• A shared zone bypassed on one partition is bypassed on all par-

titions the zone is assigned to.

• An entry delay started on a global zone sounds an entry delay on

all keypads assigned to partitions the global zone is assigned to.

• A global Delay type zone follows the longest programmed delay

time of the partitions it is assigned to.

3.6.2 Fire and CO Zone Types

Fire zones only place the partition they are assigned to into alarm.

Other partitions retain their current state.

A fire reset only resets partitions they are assigned to.

One or more fire zones may be located on any partition.

On alarm, the fire auto-scroll display appears on all partition keypads

and on all global keypads. Fire alarm silence and fire system reset

may be done directly on any partition keypad. To silence a fire or CO

alarm from a global keypad requires that the global keypad be loaned

to one of the partitions the zone is assigned to.

3.6.3 Bell/PGM Support

PGMs must be assigned to one, some or all partitions. See section

[009] for partition assignment.

NOTE: Bell PGM type requires supervision and follows arming

squawks by partition

3.6.4 Communications

Account codes are assigned to all system and partition events.

For SIA communications, a single account code (programmed in sec-

tion [310][000]) is used for all events. The partition is identified via

Nri1-8. System events use Nri0.

When using communication formats other than SIA, individual

account codes can be programmed for each partition. See [310]

Account Codes on page 47.

3.6.5 Factory Defaults

Individual modules, as well as the alarm panel itself, can have their

programming returned to factory default settings. Hardware is

defaulted via the following Installer Programming sections:

• [991] Default Keypads

• 000 – Default all keypad programming

• 001-016 – Default keypads 1-8

• [993] Default alternate communicator

• [996] Default wireless receiver

• [999] Default system

See Defaults on page 54 for more information.

Default All labels

Use programming section [000][999]. The following labels are

returned to factory default settings:

• Zone Label

• Partition Labels

• Module Labels

• Partition 1-8 Command Output 1 to 4 Labels

• Schedule 1 to 4 Labels

• Event Labels

•User Labels

System and module programming is not affected.

Hardware Reset Main Control Panel

Perform the following to restore the main control panel to default set-

tings:

1. Power down the system.

2. Remove all wires between Zone 1 and PGM 1 on the alarm con-

troller.

3. Connect a short between Zone 1 and PGM.

4. Power up the system (AC only) for 60 seconds.

5. Power down the system and remove the short.

6. Power up the system again. Factory defaults are restored.

Hardware default is logged to the event buffer.

3.7 Alternate Communicator Setup

The alternate communicator is an optional wireless communications

device that can be used as a backup to the PSTN connection or as a

primary means of communication between the alarm panel and the

central monitoring station. The alternate communicator communi-

cates via 3G (HSPA) or Ethernet.

The following configuration steps are required to set up the alternate

communicator:

• Install the alternate communicator and wire it to the alarm panel

(use PCLINK_2 header)

• Enroll the alternate communicator with Connect 24

• Set the communication path: [300]

• Enable the alternate communicator: [382] option 5

• Enable event reporting: [307]/[308]

• Program communication delay timer: [377]

• Program DLS access: [401] option 07

Section 3: Configuration

Refer to the 3G2080(R)/ TL2803G(R)/ TL280(R) installation manual

for details.

3.7.1 Real Time Clock

This feature synchronizes the alarm panel time and date with that of

the alternate communicator, provided real time clock support is avail-

able. Time and date are updated at 4:05 PM or when the system time

is lost. This feature is enabled/disabled in Installer Programming sec-

tion [024] option 5.

3.7.2 Communication Paths

The path of communication between the alarm panel and the central

station must be established through either the alarm panel’s on-board

Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) connection or through

the alternate communicator (cellular or Ethernet) if equipped.

Paths to four receivers can be programmed in Installer Programming

section [300] options 001 - 004.

For more information, see [300] Panel/Receiver Communication

Paths on page 43.

3.7.3 Communications Options

The following alarm panel options must be programmed when con-

figuring the alternate communicator:

[300] option 02: communication path (see page 43)

[380] option 01: communications enabled/disabled (see page 48)

[382] option 05: enable communicator and all associated options:

telephone number, reporting code and call direction (see page 49)

[308][351]-[356] reporting codes (see page 46)

[401] option 7: DLS access (see page 46)

3.7.4 Communication Attempt Limit

If a telephone line monitoring (TLM) trouble is present, the number

of PSTN dialing attempts is reduced from the programmed value to 0

attempts. See programming section [380] option 7 – Reduced Dialing

Attempts on page 49 for details.

3.7.5 Supervision Restore

If the alarm system experiences a failure to communicate (FTC) with

the central monitoring station, it automatically attempts to transmit

the event when communications are restored.

3.7.6 Remote Firmware Upgrade

Firmware upgrades are automatically pushed to the alarm panel and

modules from connect 24 or DLS. A message is displayed on LCD

keypads indicating a firmware upgrade is available. On all keypads,

the blue proximity tag bar flashes one second on - one second off.

Users authorize the firmware upgrade through [*][6][master

code][17].

During the update, a message indicating that a firmware upgrade is in

progress is displayed on the LCD keypad. If the firmware update

fails, an error message is displayed on LCD keypads.

Firmware updates are performed under the following conditions:

• The system is not armed

• No AC trouble is present

• No low battery trouble is present

• No FTC trouble is present

• Every alarm in memory has been viewed

• No events are being communicated

• An alternate communicator is present

Remote firmware upgrade is possible for the following modules:

• hardwired keypads, including RFK

• wireless transceivers

• alternate communicators

NOTE: For UL listed installations, do not use remote programming

unless an installer is on the premises.

3.8 Local Firmware Upgrade

Alarm panel firmware can be upgraded locally via DLS. Firmware

upgrade prevention rules are ignored when performing a local firm-

ware upgrade.

To perform a local firmware upgrade:

1. Remove the front cover of the alarm panel and plug the DLS

header into the PCLink 2 connector on the alarm controller.

2. Power down and power up the system.

NOTE: The DLS session must be initiated within 10 seconds of

power up. Do not attempt to perform a firmware upgrade if low bat-

tery trouble is present.

3. Open the Flash Utility within DLS, select the latest firmware

file from the Web or browse to a saved flash file on your hard

drive. Follow the steps as prompted by the Flash Utility applica-

tion. A message is displayed when download is complete.

4. Once the firmware update is complete, the system powers up.

3.9 Testing the System

3.9.1 Walk Test

Installer Walk Test

Walk test enables the installer to test the operation of each detector

by tripping zones without causing an actual alarm. Enter section

[901] to initiate a walk test. When a zone is tripped, all system sirens

emit a tone to indicate that the zone is working correctly.

After 15 minutes without zone activity, the walk test terminates auto-

matically. To manually exit walk test mode, enter [901] again.

3.9.2 Viewing the Event Buffer

The event buffer contains logs of events that have occurred on the

alarm system beginning with the most recent. The capacity of the

event buffer is scalable and can hold 500/1000 events (depending on

panel model) before rolling over. The buffer displays events accord-

ing to their time stamp, beginning with the most recent. The event

buffer can be uploaded when it reaches 75% capacity.

NOTE: Each event displays the time and date, a description of the

event, the zone label, access code number or any other pertinent

information. To view the event buffer, press [*][6][master

code][*][*].

Section 4: System Operation

4.1 Arming and Disarming

The following table describes the various arming and disarming

methods available.

Table 4-1 Arming/Disarming Methods

For detailed arming/disarming instructions, see the PowerSeries Neo

User Manual.

4.2 Partition vs. Global Keypad

Keypads can be configured to control an individual partition or all

partitions (see Keypad Partition Setup on page 12). Loaning a keypad

to another partition does not require an access code; However, no

function that requires an access code can be performed on that parti-

tion unless the user’s code has sufficient permission.

Single Partition Operation

Single partition keypads provide access to alarm functionality for an

assigned partition.

Single partition keypads behave as follows:

• Display the armed state of the partition

• Display open zones, if the zone belongs to the partition the key-

pad is on

• Display bypassed zones and allow zone bypassing or creating

bypass groups of zones assigned to the keypad partition

• Display system troubles (system low battery, system component

faults/tampers)

• Display alarms in memory that occurred on the partition

• Allow the door chime to be enabled/disabled

• Activate system test (sounds bells/PGMs assigned to the parti-

tion)

• Allow label programming (zone, partition and user labels for the

partition)

• Control command outputs (those assigned to the partition, or

global outputs such as smoke detector reset)

• Display temperature (not evaluated by UL)

Global/Multiple Partition Operation

1. Global keypads display a list of all active partitions or assigned

partitions along with their current state. The Global status

screen displays the following:

12345678 (RA!N----)

R = Ready

A = Armed

! = Alarm

N = Not Ready

- = Partition not enabled

In the following example, partition 1 is armed, partition 2 is dis-

armed and ready, partition 3 is disarmed and not ready, partition

4 is in alarm, and partitions 4-8 are not enabled.

Global keypads behave as follows:

• Troubles are displayed and sounded on the global keypad. Trou-

bles can be viewed from the global keypad display by pressing

the right scroll key then (*). The Troubles menu is displayed.

An access code may be required to enter the [*][2] menu

depending on system programming.

• Keypad function keys can be programmed for Global Stay Arm,

Global Away Arm and Global Disarm.

• Multiple partition arming may be done from a global keypad

assigned to the same partitions as the user.

4.3 Labels

Various custom labels can be created to make identification of the

alarm system, partitions, zones and modules simpler. Labels are cre-

ated by inputting text manually, by selecting words from the Word

Library or by downloading/uploading using DLS and Connect 24

interactive software. See “[000] Label Programming” on page 26.

4.3.1 System Label

This feature is used to program a custom label for the security sys-

tem. This label is used in the event buffer when system events occur.

The maximum label size is 14 ASCII characters.

See page 27 for programming details.

4.3.2 Zone Labels

Customized labels can be created for each zone on the alarm system.

These labels are used on various displays and events to identify the

zone. The maximum label size is 14 x 2 ASCII characters.

See page 26 for more details.

4.3.3 Partition Labels

Each partition on the alarm system can have a unique label to identify

it. This label is displayed on partition keypads and event messages.

The maximum label size is 14 x 2 ASCII characters.

See page 27 for more details.

4.3.4 Module Labels

Labels can be created for the following optional system modules:

•keypads

• 8 zone expander modules

• 8 output expander modules

• wireless transceiver

• power supply

• 4 high-current output module

• alternate communicator module

•siren

•repeater

The maximum label size is 14 ASCII characters.

See page 27 for more details.

Method Description

Away Arm for 2 seconds + [Access Code*]

Stay Arm for 2 seconds + [Access Code*]

Night Arm + [Access Code*]

Disarm [Access Code]

No-Entry

Arming + [Access Code*]

Quick Arm/

Quick Exit

12345678

ARN!----

Section 4: System Operation

4.3.5 Event Labels

Customizable labels can be created for the following events:

• Fire alarm

• Fail to arm

• Alarm when armed

• CO alarm

The maximum label size is 14 ASCII characters. See page 27 for

more details.

4.3.6 Partition Command Output Labels

This feature is used to program custom labels for command outputs.

These labels are used with output activation events in the event buf-

fer. The maximum label size is 14 x 2 ASCII characters. See page 27

for more details.

4.4 Annunciation

4.4.1 Door Chime

The keypad can be programmed to use one of four different door

chime tones for each zone on the system. Chime is active only during

the disarm state. Only one door chime option can be enabled for each

zone.

•Beeps

• Bing-Bong

• Ding-Dong

• Alarm Tone

Chime is enabled/disabled on a partition using the [*][4] command.

4.4.2 Temperature Display

Indoor and outdoor temperature can be displayed on system keypads

if configured in keypad programming section [861]-[876]>[023]

option 7, and sections [041]-[042]. Temperature is detected using

wireless temperature sensors installed on the system. Refer to Com-

patible Devices on page 2.

Global keypads only display outdoor temperature.

4.4.3 Low Temperature Warning

Keypads can be configured to detect low ambient temperature.

If the temperature at the keypad drops to 6° C ± 2° C (43° F ± 3°F),

the keypad zone goes into alarm. When the temperature rises above

9° C ± 2° C (48° F ± 3° F), the keypad zone is restored.

When this option is enabled, the keypad’s zone input functionality is

disabled. The keypad’s PGM output is not affected.

Refer to section [861]-[876]>[023] option 8 for more information.

NOTE: This feature has not been evaluated by UL/ULC.

4.5 Keypad Function Keys

Keypads have 5 programmable function keys that can be configured

to perform one of the following actions:

Table 4-2 Function Key Programming Options

To program a function key:

1. Enter Installer Programming [*][8].

2. Enter section [861] for function key programming.

3. Enter [001] to [005] to select a function key to program.

4. Enter a 2-digit number to assign a function key operation - [00] -

[68]. See table above.

5. Continue from step 3 until all function keys are programmed.

6. Press the [#] key twice to exit Installer Programming.

Programmed function keys must be pressed for 2 seconds in order to

activate the function.

4.5.1 Function Key Definitions

This section provides detailed descriptions of each programmable

function key option.

[00] Null Function Key

This option deactivates the function key. The key does not perform

any function when pressed.

[02] Instant Stay Arm

This feature is similar to the Stay Arm function key, except that no

acknowledgment beeps are sounded, no exit delay is applied and the

system arms immediately.

If no Stay/Away zone types are programmed, the alarm system arms

in Away mode.

NOTE: Do not use this function with CP-01 installations.

[03] Stay Arm

Only perimeter zones are armed. Interior zones are bypassed regard-

less of whether or not delay zones are tripped during the exit delay.

[04] Away Arm

All interior and perimeter zones are armed. This option only works

while the system is disarmed.

[05] No-Entry Arm [*][9]

All Delay 1 and Delay 2 zones become instant zones. If a door or

window is opened the system goes immediately into alarm. This

function is typically used when no occupants are expected to return

to the site during the armed period. Activation of this function key

requires an access code. This function only works while the system is

disarmed.

See [*][9] No-Entry Arming on page 22 for more information.

[06] Chime On/Off

This function turns the door chime on or off and is the equivalent of

pressing [*][4]. The alarm system must be disarmed to use this func-

tion. If option 7 in section [023] is enabled, this function key requires

an access code.

[07] System Test

This function performs a system test when pressed and is the equiva-

lent of entering [*][6][Access Code][4]. The alarm system must be

disarmed to use this function. See System Test on page 21 for more

information.

[09] Night Arm

All perimeter and interior zones, excluding Night zones, are armed.

This key only works while the system is disarmed or armed in Stay

mode.

If no Night type zones are programmed, the alarm system arms in

Away mode with an audible exit delay. Exit delay is silent and no

acknowledgment beeps are sounded.

Arming in this mode activates the Away Arming PGM output.

[12] Global Stay Arm

This function arms all partitions assigned to the user in Stay mode,

provided they are ready to arm. If a partition is not ready, the system

cannot be armed. An access code is required with this option.

[00] Null Function Key [17] Arm Interior

[02] Instant Stay Arm [21]-[24] Command Output 1 to 4

[03] Stay Arm [29] Bypass Group Recall

[04] Away Arm [31] Local PGM Activate

[05] [*][9] No-Entry Arm [32] Bypass Mode

[06] Chime On/Off [33] Bypass Recall

[07] System Test [34] User Programming [*][5]

[09] Night Arm [35] User Functions [*][6]

[12] Global Stay Arm [37] Time & Date Program

[13] Global Away Arm [39] Trouble Display [*][2]

[14] Global Disarming [40] Alarm Memory [*3]

[16] Quick Exit [61]-[68] Partition 1 to 8 Select

Section 4: System Operation

[13] Global Away Arm

This function arms all partitions assigned to the user in Away mode,

provided they are ready to arm. If a partition is not ready, the system

cannot be armed. An access code is required with this option.

[14] Global Disarming

This function disarms all partitions assigned to the user. An access

code is required with this option.

[16] Quick Exit

Pushing this key allows the user to exit the premises without disarm-

ing the system. This function is equivalent to entering [*][0] at the

keypad while the partition is armed. If quick exit is not enabled on

the system, or if the system is disarmed, pressing this key causes an

error tone. An access code is not required to use this key. See 3 –

Quick Exit on page 38 for more information.

[17] Arm Interior

This key removes or enables automatic bypass on all Stay/Away

zones (equivalent to pressing [*][1] while armed).

If Night zones are programmed, the system arms in Night mode. If no

Night zones are programmed, the system arms in Away mode. If the

system is armed in Stay mode, the resulting armed mode depends on

the presence of Night zones. If armed in Night or Away mode, this

key switches the system back to Stay mode. Pressing this key does

not switch the system from Night to Away.

This key only works while the system is armed and requires an

access code entry if section [015] option 4 is disabled.

[21]-[24] Command Output 1 to 4

This function controls command outputs 1-4 and is the equivalent of

entering [*][7][X], where X is 1, 3 or 4.

An access code is required to use this function.

Selecting command output 2 is the equivalent of pressing [*][7][2]

sensor reset. See 103 – Sensor Reset [*][7][2] on page 34 for more

information.

[29] Bypass Group Recall

This function bypasses all zones belonging to the bypass group.

Zones must be saved in the bypass group for this function key to

operate. An access code is required to use this feature if section [023]

option 4 is enabled.

[31] Local PGM Activate

This function controls a PGM connected to a keypad.

[32] Bypass Mode

This function places the keypad in Zone Bypass mode. Selecting this

function is the equivalent of pressing [*][1] while disarmed. If an

access code is required for bypassing, the user must enter the access

code before using this function. An access code is required if section

[023] option 4 is enabled.

[33] Bypass Recall

This function bypasses the same set of zones that were bypassed the

last time the partition was armed. This function is equivalent to

pressing [999] while in the [*][1] menu. An access code is required

to use this feature if section [023] option 4 is enabled.

[34] User Programming

This function is the equivalent of entering [*][5]. An access code is

required to use this function. This key only works while the system is

disarmed.

[35] User Functions

This function puts the keypad in user programming mode and is the

equivalent of entering [*][6]. An access code is required to use this

function. If section [023] option 8 is off, only the Master code can

access the [*][6] menu.

[37] Time & Date Program

This function places the keypad in date/time programming mode. A

valid access code is required.

[39] Trouble Display

This function puts the keypad in trouble display mode and is equiva-

lent to pressing [*][2]. This function only works while the system is

disarmed. This function key requires a code if section [023] option 5

is enabled.

[40] Alarm Memory

This function puts the keypad in alarm memory display mode and is

equivalent to pressing [*][3]. This function only works while the sys-

tem is disarmed. This function key requires a code if section [023]

option 6 is enabled.

[61]-[68] Partition 1 to 8 Select

This function selects partition 1-8 when the assigned key is pressed.

Pressing and holding the key for 2 seconds selects the next partition.

4.6 Language Selection

The keypad can be programmed to display messages and labels in

different languages. Perform the following from the Installer Pro-

gramming menu:

1. Enter installer programming [*][8][installer code]

2. Enter section [000]>[000].

3. Select a language using the scroll buttons or by entering a hotkey:

Table 4-3 Languages

4. Press [#] to exit.

4.7 [*] Commands

[*] commands provide convenient access to alarm system features.

The following commands are available:

[*][1] Bypass zones

[*][2] View troubles

[*][3] View alarms in memory

[*][4] Door chime on/off

[*][5] User programming

[*][6] User functions

[*][7] Command output 1-4 on/off

[*][8] Installer programming mode

[*][9] No entry arming

[*][0] Quick arm/Exit

While in a [*] command menu, use the [*] key to select an option and

the [#] key to exit to the previous screen. On an LCD keypad, use the

scroll keys to view options.

[01] – English [15] – Greek

[02] – Spanish [16] – Turkish

[03] – Portuguese [18] – Croatian

[04] – French [19] – Hungarian

[05] – Italian [20] – Romanian

[06] – Dutch [21] – Russian

[07] – Polish [22] – Bulgarian

[08] – Czech [23] – Latvian

[09] – Finish [24] – Lithuanian

[10] – German [25] – Ukrainian

[11] – Swedish [26] – Slovakian

[12] – Norwegian [27] – Serbian

[13] – Danish [28] – Estonian

[14] – Hebrew [29] – Slovenian

Section 4: System Operation

4.7.1 [*][1] Bypass or Stay/Away/Night

Zones

The [*][1] command functions differently depending on whether the

system is armed or disarmed.

NOTE: For UL/ULC listed installations, group bypass is not allowed.

When The Alarm System is Disarmed

Users can bypass individual zones or a programmed group of zones

using the [*][1] keypad command. Zones are commonly bypassed if

users want to have access to an area while the partition is armed, or to

bypass a defective zone (bad contact, damaged wiring) until service

can be provided. A bypassed zone does not cause an alarm.

When the partition is disarmed, all zones that were bypassed using

[*][1] are no longer bypassed, except for 24-hr zones.

If the Code Required for Bypass option is enabled, an access code is

required to enter bypass mode. Only access codes with the Bypass

attribute enabled can bypass zones (see Access Code Attributes on

page 20).

Bypassing zones with an LCD keypad:

1. Ensure the system is disarmed.

2. Press [*] to enter the function menu. The keypad displays “Press

[*] for < > Zone Bypass.”

3. Press [1] or [*], then key in your access code (if required).

4. Scroll to a zone or key in the three-digit zone number. Only

zones enabled for zone bypassing are displayed. Press [*] to

bypass the zone.

“B” appears on the display to indicate the zone is bypassed. If a

zone is open, “O” appears on the display. When an open zone is

bypassed, the “O” is replaced by “B.”

5. To clear a bypassed zone, repeat the above procedure. The “B”

disappears from the display indicating that the zone is no longer

bypassed.

6. To exit bypass mode and return to the ready state, press [#].

Bypassing zones with a LED/ICON keypad:

1. Ensure the system is disarmed.

2. Press [*][1], then enter your access code (if required).

3. Enter the three-digit number of the zone(s) to be bypassed. The

zone light turns on to indicate that the zone is bypassed.

4. To clear a bypassed zone, repeat the above procedure. On LED

keypads, the zone light turns off to indicate that the zone is no

longer bypassed.

5. To exit bypass mode and return to the ready state, press [#].

NOTE: LED Keypads display the bypass status of zones 1-16 only.

Other Bypass Features:

The following features are also available on the [*][1] zone bypass

menu:

Bypass Open Zones

Displays all currently open or bypassed zones. Use the scroll keys to

view zones. Open zones are indicated by an (O). To bypass a zone,

press [*]. A bypassed zone is indicated by a (B).

NOTE: Zones with tampers or faults must be manually bypassed.

Bypass Group

Displays a programmed group of zones (bypass group) commonly

bypassed. Press [*] to bypass all zones in the group.

Program Bypass Group

To program a bypass group, bypass all desired zones then select

Bypass Options > Program Bypass Group. The selected zones are

saved to the bypass group. When finished, press [#] to exit.

In order to program a bypass group, a master or supervisor code with

access to the appropriate partition must be used.

Bypass Recall

Press [*] while in this menu to bypass the same group of zones that

were bypassed the last time the partition was armed.

Clear Bypasses

Press [*] to clear all bypasses.

Shortcuts from the [*][1] base menu:

991 = bypass group

995 = program group 1

998 = bypass open zones

999 = bypass recall

000 = clear group

When The Alarm System is Armed

When the system is armed, pressing [*][1] toggles between stay,

away or night arming. If a night zone is on the system, pressing [*][1]

either prompts the user for an access code if required, or sounds an

acknowledgment tone and changes the arming mode.

NOTE: If section [022], Option 5 [Stay/Away Toggle] is on, the system

does not change from Away to Stay mode.

The zone attribute for zone bypassing must be enabled (see section

[002] Zone Attributes, Option 04).

Holdup zones should not be part of bypass groups.

A zone that is manually bypassed via [*][1] will bypass the alarm,

fault, and tamper conditions when DEOL is used.

If a 24-hour zone is bypassed, ensure that the zone is restored or dis-

abled before removing the bypass.

4.7.2 [*][2] Trouble Display

This feature is used to view system troubles. If a trouble is present,

the keypad Trouble indicator illuminates and an audible indication is

emitted (two short beeps every 10 seconds, except while in AC fail-

ure). Silence the audible indicator by pressing [#].

Troubles may be viewed while the system is armed or disarmed. The

system may be programmed to show all troubles while armed or only

fire troubles. See section [13] option 3 on page 37 for details.

The system can be configured to require a user code to view [*][2]

system troubles. See section [023] option 5.

To view trouble conditions:

• Press [*][2] to enter the Trouble menu.

On an LCD keypad, scroll to a trouble type then press [*] to

view the specific trouble. The zone name and trouble condition

for each trouble are displayed on the screen.

On LED/ICON keypads, zone indicator lights illuminate to

identify existing trouble types (e.g., Zone light 1 represents Ser-

vice Required trouble type). Press the number key correspond-

ing to a zone light to view the specific trouble. Lights 1-12

illuminate to indicate the trouble as follows:

Table 4-4: Trouble Indications

Trouble 01 – Service Required:

[01] Bell Circuit Trouble: The bell circuit is open.

[02] RF Jam: The HSM2HOSTx has detected an RF Jam condition.

[03] Aux Supply Trouble: The alarm controller, HSM2204 or

HSM2300 has an overcurrent condition on Aux.

[04] Time and Date: System time and date require programming.

[05] Output 1 Fault: An HSM2204 module has detected an open

condition on output #1.

Section 4: System Operation

4.7.3 [*][3] Alarm Memory Display

The Memory light flashes if an alarm, tamper or fault event occurred

during the last armed period or while the panel was disarmed (24

hour zones). Press [*][3] to view zones in alarm memory. To clear

the memory, arm and disarm the system. When viewing alarms in

memory, LCD keypads indicate the last zone that has gone into alarm

first, followed by other alarms in numerical order.

Trouble 02 – Module Battery Trouble:

[01] Panel Low Battery Trouble: The battery voltage (under load) is

below 11.5V. Restores at 12.5V.

[02] Panel No Battery: No battery connected to alarm controller.

[04] HSM2204 01 - 04 Low Battery: An HSM2204 has a battery

voltage less than 11.5V.

[05] HSM2204 01 - 04 No Battery: No battery connected to

HSM2204.

[07] HSM2300 01 - 04 Low Battery: An HSM2300 has a battery

voltage less than 11.5V

[08] HSM2300 01 - 04 No Battery: No battery connected to

HSM2300.

Trouble 03 – Bus Voltage:

[01] HSM2HOSTx Bus Low Voltage: The HSM2HOSTx module

has measured less than 6.3V on its Aux input.

[02] Keypad 01 - 16 Bus Low Voltage: A hardwired keypad has a

bus voltage of less than 6.9V for ICON/LCD (RF version) and 7.7V

for non-RF models.

[04] HSM2108 01 - 15 Bus Low Voltage: A zone expander has a bus

voltage of less than 5.9V.

[05] HSM2300 01 - 04 Bus Low Voltage: A power supply has a bus

voltage of less than 6.9V.

[06] HSM2204 01 - 04 Bus Low Voltage: A high current output

module has a bus voltage of less than 6.9V.

[08] HSM2208 01 - 16 Bus Low Voltage: The low current output

module has detected a voltage less than 5.9V on its aux input.

Trouble 04 – AC Troubles:

[01] Zone 001 - 128 AC Trouble: An AC trouble has been detected

on a PGX934 PIR + Camera.

[03] Siren 01 - 16 AC: A siren has an AC trouble.

[04] Repeater 01 - 08 AC: A wireless repeater has an AC trouble.

[05] HSM2300 01 - 04 AC: An HSM2300 has an AC trouble.

[06] HSM2204 01 - 04 AC: An HSM2204 has an AC trouble.

[07] Panel AC: The alarm controller has an AC failure condition.

Trouble 05 – Device Faults:

[01] Zone 001 - 128: A zone is in fault. Additional information dis-

played on LCD keypads for the following troubles: Fire (2-W

Smoke, PGX916, PGX926, PGX936), Heat (PGX946), Freeze

(PGX905), CO (PGX913), and Probe Disconnected (PGX905). Also

generated by a short on hardwired zones when DEOL is used or by a

wireless supervisory fault.

[02] Keypad 01 - 16: A wireless or hardwired keypad is in fault.

[03] Siren 01 - 16: A siren is in fault.

[04] Repeater 01 - 08: A wireless repeater is in fault (supervisory or

loss of AC/DC).

Trouble 06 – Device Low Battery:

[01] Zone 001- 128: Wireless zone has a low battery.

[02] Keypad 01-16: Keypad has a low battery.

[03] Siren 01 - 16: Siren has a low battery.

[04] Repeater 01 - 08: Repeater has a low battery.

[05] User 01 - 95: Wireless Key has a low battery.

Trouble 07 – Device Tampers:

[01] Zone 001 - 128 Tamper: A wireless or hardwired zone config-

ured for DEOL operation is in tamper.

[02] Keypad 01 - 16 Tamper: A hardwired or wireless keypad is in

tamper.

[03] Siren 01 - 16 Tamper: A wireless siren is in tamper.

[04] Repeater 01 - 08 Tamper: A wireless repeater is in tamper.

Trouble 08 – RF Delinquency Trouble:

[01] Zone 001 - 128 RF Delinquency: No response from a wireless

zone for 13 minutes. This trouble prevents arming until acknowl-

edged or cleared using [*][2].

[02] Keypad 01 - 16 RF Delinquency: No response from a wireless

keypad for 13 minutes.

[03] Siren 01 - 16 RF Delinquency: No response from a wireless

siren for 13 minutes.

[04] Repeater 01 - 16 RF Delinquency: No response from a wireless

repeater for 13 minutes.

Trouble 09 – Module Supervisory Trouble:

[01] HSM2HOSTx not responding.

[02] Keypad 01 - 16 not responding.

[04] HSM2108 01 - 15 not responding.

[05] HSM2300 01 - 04 not responding.

[06] HSM2204 01 - 04 not responding.

[08] HSM2208 01 - 16 not responding.

Trouble 10 – Module Tamper Trouble:

[01] HSM2HOSTx Tamper.

[02] Keypad 01 - 16 Tamper.

[04] HSM2108 01 - 15 Tamper.

[05] HSM2300 01 - 04 Tamper.

[06] HSM2204 01 - 04 Tamper.

[08] HSM2208 01 - 16 Tamper.

Trouble 11 – Communications:

[01] TLM: Telephone line disconnected from control panel.

[02] Receiver 01-04 FTC Trouble: Failure to communicate using

programmed receiver paths.

[03] Alt. Comm SIM Lock: SIM card has incorrect or unrecognized

PIN.

[04] Alt. Comm Cellular: Radio or SIM card failure, low signal

strength detected, or cellular network fault.

[05] Alt. Comm Ethernet: Ethernet connection unavailable. A valid

IP address is either not programmed or the module was unable to get

an IP with DHCP.

[06] Receiver 01-04 Absent: Alternate communicator unable to ini-

tialize a receiver.

[07] Receiver 01-04 Supervision: Alternate communicator unable to

communicate with a receiver.

[09] Alt. Comm Fault: The alternate communicator has stopped

responding.

[10] Alt Comm FTC Trouble: The alternate communicator has failed

to communicate an internal event not generated by the panel.

Trouble 12 – Not Networked Troubles:

[01] Zone 001-128 Not Networked Trouble: Generated when a zone

becomes out of sync with the wireless network or has not been syn-

chronized with the network after enrollment.

[02] Keypad 01-16 Not Networked Trouble: Generated when a key-

pad becomes out of sync with the wireless network or has not been

synchronized with the network after enrollment.

[03] Siren 01-16 Not Networked Trouble: Generated when a siren

becomes out of sync with the wireless network or has not been syn-

chronized with the network after enrollment.

[04] Repeater 01-08 Not Networked Trouble: Generated when a

repeater becomes out of sync with the wireless network or has not

been synchronized with the network after enrollment.

[05] Wireless Key 01-32 Not Networked Trouble: Generated when a

wireless key becomes out of sync with the wireless network or has

not been synchronized with the network after enrollment.

Section 4: System Operation

This feature can be programmed to require an access code. See sec-

tion [023] option 6 for details.

A programmable function key may be configured to display alarms

in memory. See “Keypad Function Keys” on page 15 for details.

If configured, alarms in memory must be cleared on 24-hour zones

before arming.

4.7.4 [*][4] Door Chime Enable/Disable

When this feature is enabled, the keypad emits a tone whenever a

zone programmed as a Chime type is opened or closed. Pressing

[*][4] toggles between enabled and disabled. The door chime attri-

bute for each zone is programmed in section [861]-[876], subsections

101-228.

A function key can also be programmed to enable/disable this fea-

ture. See “Keypad Function Keys” on page 15 for details. This fea-

ture may require an access code. See section [023], option 7 for

details.

The following door chime sounds may be selected:

• 6 beeps

• "Bing-Bing"

• "Ding-Dong"

• Alarm tone

4.7.5 [*][5] Program Access Codes

Use this section to perform the following functions:

• press [1] to program user codes 02-95, and master code 01

• press [2] to enroll a proximity tag

• press [3] to enroll/assign a wireless key

• press [4] to add a custom label for each user

• press [5] to assign users to partitions

• press [6] to program user attributes

Assign Access Codes

In order to access alarm system functionality, users must be added to

the system. This involves creating a unique access code and assign-

ing attributes to each user. Access codes are programmed via the

[*][5] menu.

Access Code Types

The alarm system provides the following access code types:

* Can only change master code if section [015] option 6 is off.

** Yes if [023] option 8 is on.

The first two codes in the previous table are system codes. They can

be changed but not deleted. The other codes are user-defined and can

be added or deleted as necessary. By default, access codes have the

same partition and attribute programming as the code used to pro-

gram them.

Access codes are either 4 or 6 digits in length, depending on the set-

ting of programming section [041]. Duplicate codes are not valid.

Installer Code

This code provides access to Installer Programming [*][8]. The

installer code can access all partitions and perform any keypad func-

tion. This code can be programed by the installer in section

[006][003]. The default is 5555 (4-digit) or 555555 (6-digit).

Master Code - Access Code [01]

By default the master code can access all partitions and can perform

any keypad function. This code can be used to program all access

codes, including the supervisor and duress codes.

If section [015] option 6 is on, the master code can only be changed

by the installer via Installer Programming.

The default is 1234 (4-digit) or 123456 (6-digit).

Maintenance Code

The maintenance code can only be used to arm and disarm the sys-

tem. It cannot bypass zones. Use [*][9] to arm the system, cancel

auto-arming, or perform [*][7] command functions. No arm/disarm

bell squawks are sounded when the maintenance code is used. The

Maintenance code can be programed by the installer in programming

section [006][003]. The default is AAAAAA.

User Codes - Access Codes [02] to [95]

This type of access code is used to arm and disarm assigned parti-

tions and perform other functions as programmed. It can access the

[*][6] menu if programming option [023] option 8 is on. This code

cannot access the [*][5] and [*][8] menus.

User access codes are created by the master user or supervisor users.

Supervisor Codes - Access Codes [02] to [95]

A supervisor code is a user code with the Supervisor attribute

enabled. Users with this attribute can access the [*][5] and [6] user

code programming section for the partition they are assigned to.

However, these codes can only program codes which have equal or

lesser attributes. These attributes are changeable via the [*][5] menu.

A supervisor code is created by the master user or other supervisor

users.

Duress Codes - Access Codes [02] to [95]

Duress codes function the same as user access codes, except they

transmit a duress reporting code when used to perform any function

on the system.

Duress codes cannot be used to access [*][5], [*][6] or [*][8] menus.

Duress codes are created by the master user or supervisor users.

NOTE: Section [019] option 6 must be on to select the Duress Codes

attribute.

One Time Use Code

A one time use code is a user code with the One Time User attribute

enabled. This access code enables the user to arm the alarm system

an unlimited number of times. However, a user with this code can

only disarm the system once per day. The ability to disarm is reset at

midnight or when the one time user code is keyed in by the master

code user.

NOTE: One time use code cannot be applied to wireless keys.

One time use codes are created by the master user or supervisor users.

To add an access code using an LCD keypad:

1. Press [*][5][master/supervisor code] to edit access codes 02-95.

2. Use the scroll keys to select a user then press [*] to edit.

3. On the “Press (*) for Access Code” menu, press [*]. The current

access code is displayed.

4. Key in the new access code. The code is saved when the last

number is keyed in.

To erase an access code, select the user number and enter [*] as

the first digit.

A “-” beside a user code indicates it is not programmed. A “P”

indicates the code is programmed. A “T” indicates the code is

programmed and a proximity tag is enrolled.

On an LED/ICON keypad:

1. Press [*][5][master/supervisor code]

2. Key in a 2-digit user number.

Code Add

User

Delete

User Arm Disarm [*][5] [*][6] [*][8]

Installer No No No No No No Yes

Master All* All Yes Yes Yes Yes No

Maintenance No No Yes Yes No No No

User No No Yes Yes No No** No

Supervisor All but

Master

All but

Master

Yes Yes Yes Yes N o

Duress No No Yes Yes No No No

One-time user No No Yes 1/day No No No

Section 4: System Operation

3. Press [1] to select access code.

4. Key in a new access code.

Access Code Attributes

Each user code has 6 attributes that can be toggled on or off.

The default attributes of an access code are the same as the code used

to enter [*][5], whether a new code is programmed or an existing one

is edited. The available attributes are as follows:

• Supervisor

• Duress code

• Zone bypassing

• Remote access

• Bell squawk

• One time user code

1 – Supervisor

Converts standard user into supervisor user. See Access Code Types

on page 19 for details.

2 – Duress Code

Converts standard user code into duress code. See Access Code

Types on page 19 for details.

3 – Zone Bypassing

Users with this attribute can bypass zones. Section [023] option 4,

Access code required for [*][1], must be on to use this attribute.

4 – Remote Access

Users with this attribute can access the alarm system remotely via

SMS.

7 – Bell Squawk

When this option is assigned, the main bell squawks when the alarm

system is away armed. For example, use the arm/disarm bell squawk

attribute to have wireless key access codes squawk the bell, while

other codes are silent. To do this, enable this attribute on all access

codes associated with wireless keys. This option is off by default for

all access codes.

NOTE: 1 squawk indicates arming completed; two squawks indicates

disarming completed.

NOTE: This feature is independent of the system option “Bell Squawk

on Away Arming.” See page 39.

The master code cannot use the Bell Squawk attribute, but is required

to enable it for other codes.

8 – One Time Use Code 'Maid's Code'

Converts standard user code into one time use code. See Access

Code Types on page 19 for details. Do not apply this code to users

with wireless keys assigned.

Using an LCD keypad:

1. Press [*][5][master code].

2. Use the scroll keys to choose a user (02-95) then press [*] to

select.

3. Scroll to “Press [*] for User Options” then press [*] to select.

4. Scroll to a user attribute and press [*] to toggle it on or off.

Using an LED/ICON keypad:

1. Press [*][5][master code]

2. Key in the 2-digit number of the access code to edit.

[5] for attribute programming.

3. Press the keypad number key corresponding to an attribute to

toggle it on or off.

Add User Labels

Custom labels can be programmed for each user to more easily iden-

tify them on the alarm system. Labels can be a maximum of 16 char-

acters.

Using an LCD keypad:

1. Press [*][5] then select a user (02-95).

2. On the “Press [*] for User Labels” screen, press [*].

3. Key in the custom user label. For instructions on how to input

labels, see page 26.

Assigning Proximity Tags

This section is used to assign proximity tags to users.

NOTE: A proximity tag cannot be assigned to the master code.

Using an LCD keypad:

1. In the [*][5] menu, select a user or enter a user number.

2. Select “Press [*] for Prox Tag”, then pass the enrolled tag near

the tag reader on the keypad. A proximity tag can only be

assigned to one user at a time. Invalid (un-enrolled) proximity

tags cannot be used.

To delete a proximity tag, select a user and then select Press [*] for

Prox Tag. Press the [*] key when prompted to delete the proximity

tag.

Using an LED/ICON keypad:

1. Press [*][5][Master/Supervisor Code].

2. Key in a 2-digit user code.

3. Key in [2].

4. Pass the enrolled tag near the tag reader on the keypad.

To increase authentication flexibility, user access can be achieved by

entering a valid user code or by swiping a proximity tag. Alterna-

tively, users can be required to enter a valid access code and present a

proximity tag. See [040] User Authentication on page 42.

NOTE: A proximity tag can not be assigned to the Master code. If a user

code with a proximity tag is deleted, the proximity tag must be re-

enrolled.

Assigning Users to Partitions

Each user code must be assigned to a partition(s) in order for the user

to be recognized by the alarm system. By default, each code has the

attributes of the code used to program it.

Using an LCD keypad:

1. Press [*][5][master code] then select a user (02-95).

An “N” indicates they are not yet assigned to a partition. A “Y”

indicates they are assigned to a partition.

2. Scroll to the partition assignment screen then press [*].

3. Use the number keys to assign partitions.

4. Press [#] to exit.

NOTE: The master code has access to all partitions and cannot be

modified.

Using an LED/ICON keypad:

1. Press [*][5][Master/Supervisor Code].

2. Key in the 2-digit access code of the user.

Key in [4]. A zone lights illuminates to indicate which partition

the user is currently assigned to. (e.g., if zone light 1 is on, the

code is assigned to partition 1).

3. Press the keypad number key corresponding to the appropriate

partition (e.g., press 1 to assign the user to partition 1).

User Authentication Options

The alarm panel can be configured to accept one of two user authen-

tication methods:

1) User code or proximity tag - the user can access the system by

entering a valid code or by presenting a proximity tag.

2) User code and proximity tag - the user must enter a valid code and

present a proximity tag to access the system. The user code and

proximity tag must match. For example, if the tag is associated

with user 04, user code 04 must be entered after presenting the

tag. Any other user code is treated as invalid.

See [040] User Authentication on page 42.

NOTE: An access code does not have to be programmed in order for a

proximity tag or wireless key to be operational.

Section 4: System Operation

4.7.6 [*][6] User Functions

The [*][6] command provides access to functions described below. If

section [023] option 8 is on, any user code can access this menu. If

option 7 is off, only the master code can access this menu.

Event Buffer

Menu: [*][6][master code] > Event Buffer

Keypad: [*][6][master code] > [*]

This option is used to view system events stored in the event buffer.

Events are listed in the order they occurred, starting with the most

recent. The time and date are listed for all events. Some events may

have a second screen with a description. An asterisk (*) on the first

screen indicates that a second screen is available.

If programmed, the event buffer automatically uploads to DLS/SA

when it reaches 75% capacity. See section [410] options 3 and 5.

System Test

Menu: [*][6][master code] > System Test

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 04

Select this option to test the alarm system's bell output, keypad

buzzer and lights, communicator and standby battery.

Time and Date

Menu: [*][6][master code] > Time and Date

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 01

Use this section to program the alarm system clock.

Enter time and date using the following format: (HH:MM); (MM-

DD-YY). Valid time entries are 00-23hours, 00-59 minutes. Valid

date entries are 1-12 months, 1-31 days.

Other programming options that may effect this user function:

[901]/[902] – Daylight Savings Begin/End on page 30.

Auto-Arm/Disarm

Menu: [*][6][master code] > Auto Arm/Disarm

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 02

With this feature enabled, the alarm system automatically arms in

away mode (stay/away zones active) or disarms at a programmed

time each day (see Auto-Arm Time below). The keypad emits three

beeps to indicate the system is armed and one long beep to indicate it

is disarmed.

All arming inhibit features such as latching tampers, AC inhibit, etc.

also inhibit Auto Arming and send the Auto Arm Cancellation code.

Auto-Arm Time

Menu: [*][6][master code] > Auto Arm Time

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 03

This function is used to program the time of day each alarm system

partition automatically arms. To program an auto-arm time, select a

day of the week and then key in the time. On LED/ICON keypads,

zone lights 1-7 represent Sunday to Saturday. Valid time entries are

00-23 hours: 00-59 minutes.

At the programmed time, the keypad buzzers beep for a programmed

duration (for ULC commercial burglary installations minimum dura-

tion is 10 minutes) to warn that automatic arming is in progress. The

siren also squawks once every 10 seconds during this warning period

if programmed to do so. When the warning period is complete, the

exit delay elapses then the system arms in away mode.

Auto-arming can be canceled or postponed only by entering a valid

access code during the programmed warning period. When a code is

entered, the warning is silenced and auto-arming is canceled or post-

poned, depending on the auto-arm postpone timer. The Auto Arm

Cancellation reporting code is transmitted (if programmed).

NOTE: Auto-arming will not silence an active bell.

NOTE: The Auto Arm Cancellation reporting code is also transmit-

ted if arming is inhibited by one of the following:

• AC / DC Inhibit Arm

• Latching System Tampers

• Zone Expander Supervisory Fault

Other programming options that may effect this function:

[151]-[158] Partition Auto-Arm/Disarm on page 42

[014] System Option 2 on page 38

Enable DLS/Allow System Service

Menu: [*][6][master code] > System Serv/DLS

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 05

This function enables and disables the DLS window for either 1 or 6

hours depending on the programming of section [025] option [7].

NOTE: DLS programming is not UL tested.

Other programming options that may effect this function:

[020] System Option 8, bit [021] System Option 9 on page 40

[025] System Option 13, bit 7 – 1 Hour DLS Window on page 41

User Call-up

Menu: [*][6][master code] > User Call-up

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 06

When selected, this function makes a single attempt to call the down-

loading computer. The downloading computer must be waiting for

the call before downloading can be performed. Only one call-up is

attempted. If a DLS phone number is not programmed, the alarm

panel attempts to reach the DLS computer via IP connection. If the

communicator is not properly configured for IP, an error tone is

sounded.

Late to Open

Menu: [*][6][master code] > Late To Open

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 09

This function enables or disables the Late to Open option. This

option sends a reporting code to the central monitoring station if the

partition has not been disarmed by a programmed time.

Other programming options that may effect this function:

[201] Open/Close Events 1, option [211] Miscellaneous Open/Close

Events on page 44.

Late to Open Time

Menu: [*][6][master code] > Late To Open Time

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 10

This function is used to program the time of day the partition must be

disarmed by when the Late to Open option is enabled. A separate

time can be programmed for each day of the week. Valid data entries

are 00:00 - 23:59. 99:99 disables the late to open feature for the

selected day.

Select a day of the week by scrolling while in the Late to Open menu,

or by using keys 1-7 to select Sunday to Saturday respectively.

SMS Programming

Menu: [*][6][master code] > SMS Programming

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 11

This function is used to program up to 8 phone numbers for SMS

command access and communications. SMS enables users to send

commands to the alarm panel via a mobile device.

Leave an SMS phone number blank to disable it. SMS phone num-

bers are not related to phone numbers used to dial the central moni-

toring station.

NOTE: If SMS command and control features are disabled (section

[382] option 5) then this function is not accessible. See the alternate

communicator installation manual for more information.

Brightness Control

Menu: [*][6][master code] > Brightness Control

Section 4: System Operation

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 12

This function is used to change the brightness level of keypad display

backlighting. Use the scroll keys to increase and decrease brightness

or enter a value from 00 to 15. Selecting 00 turns off keypad back-

lighting.

Contrast Control

Menu: [*][6][master code] > Contrast

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 13

This function is used to change the contrast level of keypad displays.

Use the scroll keys to increase and decrease contrast or enter a value

from 00 to 15. Selecting 00 turns off keypad contrast.

Buzzer Control

Menu: [*][6][master code] > Buzzer Control

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 14

This function is used to change the volume level of keypad buzzers.

Use the scroll keys (LCD keypads) or the [*] key (LED/ICON key-

pads) to increase and decrease volume or key in a value from 00 to

15. Selecting 00 turns off the keypad buzzer.

NOTE: For UL/ULC listed installations, do not turn off the keypad

sounder.

Authorize Firmware Update

Menu: [*][6][master code] > Authorize Update

Keypad: [*][6][master code] + 17

This function is used to give authorization to the system to start the

firmware upgrade process after all firmware upgrade files for the

keypads, HSM2HOST, control panel and alternate communicator

have been fully downloaded.

Once this option is activated, the keypads and system automatically

exit [*][6] and indicate that the firmware update is in progress.

4.7.7 [*][7] Command Outputs 1-4

Menu: [*][7][master code if required] > Output Control

Keypad: [*][7][master code if required]

This option is used to activate or deactivate command outputs 1 to 4

for each partition.

Using an LCD keypad:

1. Press [*][7] to enter Output Control mode.

2. Scroll to an output and press [*] to select it, or key in a PGM

number. The output is toggled on or off.

Using an LED/ICON keypad:

1. Press [*][7] to enter Output Control mode.

2. Key in a command output number. The output is toggled on or

off.

NOTE: If no command outputs are programmed this function is not

available. Other programming options that may effect this user function:

[009] PGM Types, options 121-124 – Command Outputs 1-4 on page

32.

4.7.8 [*][8] Installer Programming

Use this option to place the alarm system in Installer Programming

mode. Installer Programming is used to manually program alarm

panel and module options. An installer’s code is required to access

this function.

Installer Programming is exited automatically after 20 minutes of

inactivity.

When viewing data in sections with an LCD keypad, use the [<] and

[>] keys to scroll.

Other programming options that may effect this user function:

[990] Installer Lockout Enable/Disable on page 54.

4.7.9 [*][9] No-Entry Arming

This function is used to arm the alarm system while occupants are on

the premises. Pressing [*][9] and then keying in an access code arms

the panel without an entry delay on delay type zones and bypasses

stay/away and night type zones.

After the exit delay, delay 1 and delay 2 type zones behave the same

as instant zones. Stay/away zones remain bypassed. The entry delay

can be activated or deactivated at any time while the system is armed

using [*][9].

NOTE: If the alarm system is armed using [*][9], disarming is only pos-

sible from a keypad inside the premises unless a wireless key is used.

NOTE: Entry of a valid access code is required following this key only

when the system is disarmed. When armed, if programming section

[015] option 4 (Quick Arming/Function Key) is off, an access code entry

is required.

Global delay zones always have an entry delay, even if the system is

armed using [*][9].

4.7.10 [*][0] Quick Arm/Exit

This feature operates differently depending on whether or not the

alarm system is armed or disarmed.

When disarmed:

Pressing [*][0] arms the alarm system without having to enter an

access code. This provides a fast method of arming for regular users

and allows users without an access code to arm the system.

NOTE: The Quick Arm feature (section [015] option 4) must be enabled

in order for this function to operate as intended.

When armed:

This feature provides a means to exit the premises while the alarm

system is armed without having to disarm then rearm it.

Pressing [*][0] starts a 2-minute timer that enables any door pro-

grammed as a delay zone to be opened and closed once without trig-

gering an alarm.

If the door is not closed at the end of the exit window, the entry delay

sequence begins. Any additional activity on another zone triggers the

associated alarm or delay sequence.

4.8 SMS Command and Control

The user can perform certain functions on the alarm panel by remote

using SMS text messages. In addition, the system sends SMS mes-

sages to the user to confirm commands . SMS programming options

are accessed through programming section [851].

The security system only responds to SMS messages sent from desig-

nated phone numbers (programmed in section [851]>[311]-[342]).

For more information on SMS command and control, and for a com-

plete listing of communicator programming options, refer to the

alternate communicator installation manual.

4.8.1 SMS Command and Control Functions

The following alarm system functions are controllable via SMS:

• Stay arm the system

• Away arm the system

• Night arm the system

• Disarm the system

• Activate/deactivate command output 1-4

• System status request

• Alarm memory request

• Zone bypass

• Zone unbypass

SMS text messages must be formatted as follows:

e.g., Stay Arm partition 1 1234

Once the command is received and executed by the alarm system, the

user receives a confirmation text message.

Section 4: System Operation

4.9 Visual Verification

This feature enables the central station operator to view captured

images of the premises in the event of an alarm event. Combination

camera/motion detectors can be installed throughout the premises to

provide visual verification coverage. The microphone on the camera

PIR can be disabled.

Visual verification sessions are triggered by the following:

•Fire key

• Medical key

• Panic key

To set up video verification on a partition:

• Enroll the camera PIR; [804]

• Set video verification options; [804]>[841]:

• [001] Visual Verification Enable/Disable

• [002] View Time Window

• [003] View Other Alarms

• Input a custom label to identify the camera PIR; [000]>[001]

• Enable this option on the alternate communicator (section [10]

option 2).

Refer to the Camera PIR installation manual for more details.

NOTE: Visual Verification has not been evaluated by UL and shall be

disabled for UL certified installations.

Section 5: Programming

5.1 How to Program

This section describes how to view alarm system programming

options using the supported keypad types.

5.2 Programming Methods

The alarm system can be programmed using the following methods:

Table 5-1 Programming Methods

5.2.1 Template Programming

Template programming allows the installer to quickly program the

minimum functions required for basic operation. The installer is

prompted to enter a 5-digit code that selects predefined programming

configurations:

Digit 1 – zone 1-8 definition options

Digit 2 – system EOL options

Digit 3 – alarm controller communications options

Digit 4 – alarm controller call directions

Digit 5 – DLS connection options

(see Appendix C: Template Programming Tables on page 105 for

programming information).

Perform template programming after completing the hardware instal-

lation. Ensure you have the information listed below available.

Record this information in the programming worksheets for future

reference:

• Monitoring station telephone number - provided by the alarm

monitoring service.

• Monitoring station account code - provided by the alarm moni-

toring service.

• Downloading access code.

• Entry delay - installer defined.

• Exit delay - installer defined.

• Installer code - programmable, unique 4-digit code. The default

value is [5555].

To perform template programming:

1. At the “Ready to Arm” screen, enter [*][8][installer code][899].

2. At the “Enter Data” screen, enter [00001] to accept the existing

default programming.

Once this section has been entered, the installer cannot exit until all

sections are completed. Enter new data and/or press the [#] key to

accept the displayed data and proceed to the next section. Changing a

single digit, then pressing the [#] key advances to the next section but

does not save the changed data. Enter all 5 digits or scroll to the end

of template programming and exit to save data.

3. After entering [00001], the first telephone number is displayed.

Enter the monitoring station telephone number after the “D.”

Press [#] to complete the entry.

4. After programming the first telephone number, enter a system

account code.

• The system account code can be any 6-digit combination

of numbers (0-9) and letters (A-F). If the system account

code is 4-digits, the last two digits must be “FF.”

• To enter letters A through F, press [*] then the numbers 1

through 6 for the letter A through F respectively. Press [*]

again to revert back to decimal entry. E.g., to enter

“1234FF” press [1234*66].

See “[310] Account Codes” on page 47 for additional

details.

5. After programming the system account code, the downloading

access code is displayed. Enter the new downloading access

code or press [#] to proceed to the next step. See section [402]

PSTN DLS Phone Number Programming on page 51 for addi-

tional details.

6. The entry delay is the amount of time given to disarm the alarm

system, after entering the premises through a delay type zone,

before an alarm is sounded. Press [>][>][>] to accept the default

time of 30 seconds (030) or enter an entry delay between 001

and 255. E.g., Press 020 for a delay of 20 seconds. See “[005]

System Times” on page 30 for additional details.

7. The exit delay is the amount of time given to exit the premises

after the alarm system is armed. Press [>][>][>] to accept the

default time of 120 seconds or enter an exit delay between 001

and 255. E.g., press 030 for a delay of 30 seconds. See “[005]

System Times” on page 30 for additional details.

8. After programming the exit delay, enter a 4 or 6-digit installer

code, depending on the value in section [041] Access Code Dig-

its on page 42. See [006] Installer Defined Access Codes on

page 30 for installer code details.

9. Press [#] to exit Template Programming.

5.2.2 DLS Programming

DLS programming involves downloading custom programming

using DLS software and a computer. This can be done locally or by

remote.

NOTE: For UL listed systems an installer must be on the premises.

Local Programming With PC-Link

Follow the steps below in the sequence indicated to set up local pro-

gramming using DLS:

1. Connect AC Wiring.

In a new installation, the backup battery requires 24 Hrs.

charging. AC Power is required for PC-Link Programming until

the battery is charged.

2. Plug the PC-Link header into the alarm controller. A DLS ses-

sion is initiated on the DLS computer.

3. When the session is complete, remove the PC-Link cable from

the alarm controller.

4. Complete the installation.

Remote Programming

DLS programming can be performed remotely by connecting to the

alarm system via telephone line, cellular network or Ethernet.

Refer to section [401] DLS/SA Options on page 50 for details.

NOTE: AC Power must be present for the alarm system to answer

incoming calls from DLS.

Method Description Procedure

Template

programming

Use pre-defined

templates to quickly

apply basic

programming and to

set up DLS

downloading.

Press [899] at the “Enter

Section” screen.

See Template Programming

below for details.

DLS

programming

Download and apply

programming using

DLS-V™ (v.1.4 or

higher) software.

For local DLS, use a PC-

Link cable and laptop with

DLS-IV software installed.

For remote DLS, use a

telephone line, cellular

network or the Internet.

Installer

programming

Manually program all

alarm system and

device options.

Press [*][8][installer code]

while the system is

disarmed.

Section 5: Programming

5.2.3 Installer Programming

Installer Programming is used to manually program alarm system

options. Access this mode by keying in [*][8][Installer Code]. Use

the scroll keys to navigate through the menus or jump directly to a

specific section by keying in a section number.

Programming consists of toggling on and off options in each section

or by populating data fields. For descriptions of all programming

options, see 5.3 Programming Descriptions on page 26.

5.2.4 Viewing Programming

Programming sections can be viewed from any system keypad. The

method for viewing and selecting programming options using LCD,

LED and ICON keypads depends on the keypad type used. See

below for specific instructions on programming with each keypad

type.

Generally, programming options are accessed in the following way:

1. Enter Installer Programming mode ([*][8]).

2. Navigate to a specific programming section.

3. Select an option to view or change it’s programming.

All programming options are numbered and can be accessed by navi-

gating through the menu (LCD) or by keying in the program section

number. The programming worksheets and descriptions later in this

section provide a place to record custom programming settings and

are numerically listed to assist in locating specific sections.

Keypad Types

The sections below describe how programming is viewed and inter-

preted using each of the supported keypad types. For more informa-

tion on each keypad type, see the instruction sheet included with the

keypad.

LED and ICON

Both of these keypads use LEDs to communicate information. The

programming icon illuminates to indicate the alarm system is in

Installer Programming mode. The Armed light turns off and the

Ready light turns on while in a programming section.

Programming sections fall under two categories: those that require

options to be “toggled” on or off, and those that require data to be

keyed in.

Toggle options are indicated across the top of the display using zone

numbers 1-8. For example, if options 1 and 4 are on, the display

appears as follows on the different keypads:

Figure: 4 LED and ICON displays

To enable or disable a toggle option, press the number key on the

keypad corresponding to the option.

Sections requiring data input, such as phone numbers, display infor-

mation in a binary format using zone LEDs 1-4 as described in the

following chart:

Figure: 5

When a section is entered, the keypad immediately displays the first

digit of information programmed. Using the example in Figure 5

above, if zone 1 and 4 are illuminated, the first programmed digit in

the section is 9. Use the scroll key [>] to advance to the next digit.

For sections that require multiple two or three-digit numbers, the

keypad beeps three times after each entry and moves to the next item

on the list. After the last digit in the section is entered, the keypad

beeps rapidly eight times and exits the programming section. The

Ready light turns off and the Armed light turns on.

To exit programming at any time, press the [#] key. All changes made

up to that point are saved.

LCD Keypad

LCD keypads use a full-message display that provides visual and

numerical navigation through the programming sections. The Armed

light illuminates when Installer Programming mode is activated. Use

the scroll keys to move through menu options and press [*] to select.

Alternatively, enter a specific section number. The Armed light

flashes to indicate a sub-section has been selected. Press [*] to select

a sub-section. The Ready light illuminates and the information pro-

grammed in the section is displayed.

For programming sections with toggle options, press the correspond-

ing number on the keypad to turn the option on or off. The display

changes accordingly.

Sections requiring data input, such as phone numbers, display the full

data in fields up to 32 characters long.

To input data, use the scroll keys to select a character then press the

keypad button corresponding to the number/letter required. Scroll to

the next character and repeat the procedure as needed.

For information on entering HEX data, see below.

A 2-second error tone is sounded if an invalid key is pressed.

Press the [#] key to exit the program section at any time. All changes

made up to that point are saved.

5.2.5 Programming Hex and Decimal

Data

Hexadecimal (HEX) digits may be required during programming. To

program a HEX digit, press the [*] key while in a programming sec-

tion that requires a data entry. HEX programming mode activates and

the Ready light begins to flash.

The following table indicates which number should be pressed to

enter the corresponding HEX digit:

Table 5-2 HEX Digit Programming

The Ready light continues to flash after the HEX digit is entered. If

another HEX digit is required press the corresponding number. If a

decimal digit is required, press the [*] key again. The Ready light

illuminates and the panel returns to regular decimal programming.

Example: To enter ‘C1’ for a closing by user 1, enter [*] [3] [*], [1]

[*] to enter hexadecimal mode (Ready light flashes)

[3] to enter C

[*] to return to decimal mode (Ready light is on)

[1] to enter digit 1

If an error is made while inputting data, press the [#] key to exit the

section. Select that section again and re-enter the information cor-

rectly.

When using a pulse communications format, a decimal zero [0] does

not transmit for account and reporting codes. Programming a zero [0]

tells the alarm system not to send any pulses for that digit. Decimal

zero [0] is a filler digit. To make a zero [0] transmit, it must be pro-

grammed as a Hexadecimal ‘A.’

Value Enter Telephone Dialer

HEX [A]

HEX [B]

HEX [C]

HEX [D]

HEX [E]

HEX [F]

Press [*][1][*]

Press [*][2][*]

Press [*][3][*]

Press [*][4][*]

Press [*][5][*]

Press [*][6][*]

Not supported

Simulated [*] key

Simulated [#] key

Dial tone search

Two-second pause

End of number

Section 5: Programming

Example: For the 4-digit account number ‘4032’, enter [4] [*] [1] [*]

[3], [0].

[4] to enter the digit 4

[*] to enter Hexadecimal mode (Ready light flashes)

[1] to enter A

[*] to return to decimal mode (Ready light is solid)

[3] to enter the digit 3

[2] to enter the digit 2

5.3 Programming Descriptions

This section provides descriptions of all alarm controller options pro-

grammable by the installer.

5.3.1 Adding Labels

[000] Label Programming

Zone and other labels on the alarm system can be customized.

Program labels locally or download/upload using DLS and Connect

24 interactive software. Local label programming is done via a sys-

tem keypad, as described below.

[000] Language Selection

(LCD keypads only)

Use this section to set the language displayed by LCD keypads. To

select a language:

1. Enter Installer Programming: [*][8][Installer Code].

2. Enter programming section [000]>[000].

3. Key in the 2-digit number corresponding to the language

required. See below:

[001][001]-[128] Zone Labels

Customized labels can be created for each available zone. Labels can

be programmed at the keypad or downloaded/uploaded using DLS

and Connect 24 interactive software. The maximum label size is 14 x

2 ASCII characters.

Manual Labels

The following procedure describes how to add zone labels using the

LCD keypad:

1. Enter Installer Programming: [*][8][Installer Code].

2. Press [*], scroll to Zone Labels and press [*] again.The first

zone is displayed. Alternately, press [000][001].

3. Scroll to the zone label to be programmed or key in the zone

number. (e.g., 001 for zone label 1).

4. Scroll to the desired character’s location using the[<] [>] keys.

5. Enter the number of the corresponding character group until the

desired character is displayed (see table below).

Example: Press the “2” key 3 times to enter the letter “F.”

Press the “2” key 4 times to enter the number “2.”

To delete a character, use the [<] [>] keys to move the cursor

under the character, then press [0].

If any key other than [<] or [>] is pressed before [0], the cursor

moves one space to the right and deletes that character.

6. Press [#] to save the changes and exit.

Zone Label Options

To access zone label options such as using ASCII characters, chang-

ing letter case and clearing the display, press [*] while in Zone Label

programming. The Select Option menu is displayed. Use the [<] [>]

keys to access the following options:

Word Library

The Word Library is a database of words commonly used when pro-

gramming labels. Individual words can be combined as needed (e.g.,

Front + Door). Words that do not fit on the first line are automatically

moved to the bottom line.

To program a custom label using the Word Library:

1. Enter Installer Programming: [*][8][Installer Code].

2. Press [*], scroll to Zone Labels and press [*] again.The first

zone is displayed. Alternately, press [000][001].

3. Scroll to the zone label to be programmed or key in the zone

number (e.g., 001 for zone label 1).

4. Press [*] to open the Select Option menu.

5. Press [*] again to select the Word Entry option.

6. Enter the 3-digit number corresponding to a word (see Appen-

dix B: Word Library on page 104) or use the scroll keys [<][>]

to view words in the library.

7. Press [*] to select the word.

8. To add another word, repeat the above procedure from step 4.

9. To add a space, press the right scroll key [>].

10. To clear characters, select Clear to End or Clear Display from

the Select Options menu.

To save the current label, press [#] to exit label programming.

01 = English 11 = Swedish 22 = Bulgarian

02 = Spanish 12 = Norwegian 23 = Latvian

03 = Portuguese 13 = Danish 24 = Lithuanian

04 = French 14 = Hebrew 25 = Ukrainian

05 = Italian 15 = Greek 26 = Slovakian

06 = Dutch 16 = Turkish 27 = Serbian

07 = Polish 18 = Croatian 28 = Estonian

08 = Czech 19 = Hungarian 29 = Slovenian

09 = Finnish 20 = Romanian

10 = German 21 = Russian

Press To Select/Display

[*]

[#]

[0]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[SELECT]

[ESCAPE] (note: exits without saving label)

[SPACE]

[A], [B], [C], [1]

[D], [E], [F], [2]

[G], [H], [I], [3]

[J], [K], [L], [4]

[M], [N], [O], [5]

[P], [Q], [R], [6]

[S], [T], [U], [7]

[V], [W], [X], [8]

[Y], [Z], [9], [0]

Option Description

WORD ENTRY Provides access to the Word Library, a collec-

tion of words commonly used when program-

ming labels. See below for details.

ASCII ENTRY Used to access uncommon characters or as a

primary method for programming labels. 255

character entries are available. Use the [<] [>]

keys to scroll through the characters or enter a

3-digit number from 000-255. Press [*] to

select a character. See page 114 for available

ASCII characters.

CHANGE CASE This option toggles the letter between upper

case (A, B, C) and lower case (a, b, c).

CLEAR TO END This option clears the display from the cursor to

the end of the display.

CLEAR DISPLAY This option clears all characters.

SAVE Saves the new label.

Section 5: Programming

[051] Zone Tamper Label

This label is displayed when a zone is tampered. The maximum label

size is 14 x 1 ASCII characters.

[052] Zone Fault Label

This label is displayed when a zone is in fault. The maximum label

size is 14 x 1 ASCII characters.

[064] CO Alarm Message

Use this section to program a custom label that is displayed on key-

pads during a carbon monoxide alarm. The maximum label size is 14

x 2 characters.

[065] Fire Alarm Message

Use this section to program a custom label that is displayed on key-

pads during a fire alarm. The maximum label size is 14 x 2 charac-

ters.

[066] Fail To Arm Event Message

This message is displayed on all partition keypads if a user attempts

to arm the system when it is not ready to arm. The message clears

after five seconds. The maximum label size is 16 x 2 characters.

[067] Alarm When Armed Event Message

This message is displayed if an alarm occurred while the system was

armed. The message is displayed when the system is disarmed and

remains on the screen for 5 seconds. Following this, the zones that

went into alarm are displayed. The maximum label size is 16 x 2

characters.

[100] System Label

Use this section to program a custom label for the security system.

This label is used in the event buffer when system events occur. The

maximum label size is 14 x 1 characters.

[101]-[108] Partition 1-8 Labels

Use this section to program a name for each partition for display on

partition keypads and event messages. The maximum label size is 14

x 2 characters. See “Programming” on page 24 for specific instruc-

tions on how to program labels.

[201]-[208] Partition Command Output Labels

Use this section to program custom labels for command outputs.

These labels are used with output activation events in the event buf-

fer. Enter subsection [201] to [208] to select partition 1 to 8, then

enter subsection [001] to [004] to select command output 1 to 4 label.

The maximum label size is 14 x 2 characters. See “Programming” on

page 24 for specific instructions on how to program labels.

[601]-[604] Schedule Labels

Use this section to program custom labels for command output

schedules. These labels are used to identify schedules for PGM com-

mand outputs 1-4. The maximum label size is 16 characters. See

“Programming” on page 24 for specific instructions on how to pro-

gram labels.

[801] Keypad Labels

Use this section to create custom labels for keypads on the system.

Select 001-016 for keypads 1-16.

[802][001]-[016] HSM2108 Zone Expander Labels

Use this section to create custom labels for Zone expanders on the

system. Select 001-016 for zone expanders 1-16.

[803][001]-[016] HSM2208 Output Expander Label

Use this section to create a custom label for the output expander.

Select 001 for HSM2208. Select 001-016 for zone expanders 1-16.

[806] HSM2HOSTx Label

Use this section to create a custom label for the 2-way wireless trans-

ceiver.

[809][001]-[004] HS2300 Power Supply Label

Use this section to create custom labels for power supplies on the

system. Select 001-004 for power supply 1-4.

[810][001]-[004] HS2204 High-Current Output Supply

Label

Use this section to create custom labels for high-current output sup-

plies on the system. Select 001-004 for output supply 1-4.

[815] Alternate Communicator Label

Use this section to create a custom label for the alternate communica-

tor.

[820][001]-[016] Siren Labels

Use this section to create custom labels for sirens on the system.

Select 001-016 for sirens 1-16.

[821][001]-[008] Repeater Labels

Use this section to create custom labels for wireless repeaters on the

system. Select 001-008 for output supply 1-8.

[999][Installer Code][999] Default Labels

This section is used to return all labels to factory settings. Installer

code is required to verify deletion.

5.3.2 Zone Setup

The following section describes zone programming options.

[001] Zone Type

A zone type defines how a zone operates within the system and how

it responds when triggered.

[001]-[128] Select Zone

Every zone on the system must be assigned a zone type. The avail-

able zone types are listed below.

000 – Null Zone

Assign to all unused zones.

001 – Delay 1

Commonly assigned to primary points of entry. Follows entry delay 1

and exit delay timers (section [005]). Arming the alarm system starts

the exit delay timer. After the exit delay has expired, opening the

door starts the entry delay timer. During entry delay, the keypad

buzzer prompts the user to disarm the system.

002 – Delay 2

Commonly assigned to secondary points of entry (further from the

keypad). Follows entry delay 2 timer (section [005]).

003 – Instant

Commonly used for perimeter doors and windows, this zone type fol-

lows the exit delay. The alarm is triggered instantly if the zone is

tripped after the exit delay expires.

004 – Interior

Commonly assigned to interior motion sensors near a point of entry,

such as a foyer or hallway, that must be accessed to reach the keypad.

The alarm is activated if the system is armed and a delay type zone

(e.g., front door) is not tripped first, or if the entry/exit timer expires

before the alarm is disarmed. Otherwise, the zone is instant if tripped.

Section 5: Programming

005 – Interior Stay/Away

Similar to Interior zone type except that the system bypasses the zone

when armed in Stay mode. Commonly used to activate perimeter

zones while permitting free movement throughout the interior.

006 – Delay Stay/Away

Similar to delay 1 except that the zone is bypassed when armed in

Stay mode. Commonly used with motion detectors that cover an

entry point.

007 – Delayed 24-Hour Fire

This zone is used with smoke detectors and functions similar to the

standard fire zone, except the communicator delays the alarm mem-

ory and transmission by 30 seconds. If the alarm is acknowledged by

pressing any key, the siren is silenced and the transmission aborted. If

the smoke detector is not restored after the alarm has been acknowl-

edged, the siren output activates after 90 seconds and another 30-sec-

ond delay starts. A code is required to silence the alarm. A tamper or

fault causes a fire trouble to log and transmit.

008 – Standard 24-Hour Fire

This zone is used with smoke detectors. The siren sounds instantly

when the smoke detector is activated. If enabled, the communicator

immediately transmits the alarm to the monitoring station. A tamper

or fault of this zone type causes a fire trouble to log and transmit.

009 – Instant Stay/Away

Commonly assigned to interior motion sensors. This zone type is

bypassed when armed in Stay mode, but functions like an Instant

zone [003] when armed in Away mode.

010 – Interior Delay

Commonly assigned to interior motion sensors. When Away armed,

this zone type functions like the Interior zone type. When Stay or

night armed, tripping the zone activates entry delay 1. Tripping this

zone during exit delay does not cause the system to arm in Away

mode, as tripping a regular Delay type zone does.

011 – Day Zone

Commonly used in areas where immediate notification of entry is

desired. When disarmed, tripping this zone activates the keypad

buzzer but does not log or report the event. When armed, tripping this

zone activates the siren then logs and reports the event.

NOTE: An alarm during exit delay causes the siren to activate and

remain on when exit delay expires.

012 – Night Zone

Commonly assigned to interior motion detectors in areas accessed

during the night. This zone functions like an Interior Stay/Away zone

[005] when armed using any method except the following: If Stay

armed, this zone is bypassed; if armed using [*][1], this zone is

bypassed.

017 – 24-Hour Burglary

This zone type is active at all times. It reports an alarm if the alarm

system is armed or disarmed. This zone type sounds the siren for the

length of Bell time-out if the audible attribute is enabled.

018 – 24-Hour Bell/Buzzer

When the alarm system is armed and this type of zone is tripped, the

siren activates for the duration of the bell time-out. If the alarm sys-

tem is disarmed when this type of zone is tripped, the keypad buzzer

activates until an access code is entered.

023 – 24-Hour Supervisory

This zone is active and reports alarms at all times when tripped. The

siren and keypad buzzer do not activate.

024 – 24-Hour Supervisory Buzzer

When tripped, the keypad buzzer emits a steady tone until a valid

access code is entered.

025 – Auto Verify Fire

(Hardwired smoke detectors)

When the zone is activated, a 30-second delay begins but no fire

alarm sounds. If the same zone is activated again up to 60 seconds

after the delay expires, the alarm is triggered immediately. If the

same zone is activated after 60 seconds, the entire sequence begins

again.

If a second fire zone is violated during the auto-verify sequence, both

zones a fire alarm is immediately triggered.

(Wireless smoke detectors)

When the zone is activated, a 40-second delay begins. The alarm is

triggered if the zone is still faulted after 30 seconds. If the zone is no

longer in alarm, an 80-second verification timer begins. If any fire

zone is activated during this period, the alarm is triggered.

If another fire zone is activated during the auto verify sequence, both

zones go into alarm immediately.

Note: Wireless smoke detectors used with this zone type must have a

built in siren to act as a pre-alert to the system alarm.

027 – Fire Supervisory

When this zone is tripped, the keypad buzzer activates and a supervi-

sory alarm is sent to the monitoring station. A valid access code must

be entered to silence the buzzer.

040 – 24-Hour Gas

Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at default.This zone type

may be assigned to any device type.

041 – 24-Hour CO

This zone type is used with CO detectors. In the event of an alarm, a

distinctive siren cadence is sounded. This is followed by a 5-second

pause and then repeated. After 4 minutes, the 5-second pause is

extended to 60 seconds; however, BTO must be programmed with a

value of 5 minutes or higher. The siren is silenced when an access

code is entered or the siren times out.

042 – 24-Hour Holdup

Instant alarm when activated, silent alarm at default.

NOTE: Not for use in UL listed installations.

043 – 24-Hour Panic

Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at default.

045 – 24-Hour Heat

Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at default.

046 – 24-Hour Medical

Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at default.

047 – 24-Hour Emergency

Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at default.

048 – 24-Hour Sprinkler

Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at default.

049 – 24-Hour Flood

Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at default.

051 – 24-Hour Latching Tamper

Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at default. The alarm

system cannot be armed until Installer Programming is entered.

052 – 24-Hour Non-Alarm

This zone is active at all times but does not cause an alarm. Zone

attributes such as Zone Bypassing and Door Chime affect the func-

tionality of this zone. This zone type can also be assigned to a tem-

perature sensor if indoor/outdoor temperature display is required

without temperature warnings or alarm conditions.

Section 5: Programming

056 – 24 Hour High Temperature

This zone type is used with temperature sensors and is activated

when the temperature rises above a programmed threshold (set in

section [804]>[828]). Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at

default. This zone type generates an alarm when the system is armed

or disarmed.

NOTE: The temperature threshold includes a 2.5 °C (5 °F) differ-

ence between a given state and its restored condition. For example,

an alarm at 6 °C is restored at 3.5°C (High temperature) or 8.5°C

(Low temperature), depending upon the zone type selected.

The zone type for temperature sensors must be 24 Hour High/Low

Temperature in order for the sensor to operate properly.

057 – 24 Hour Low Temperature

This zone type is used with temperature sensors and is activated

when the temperature drops below a programmed threshold (set in

section [804]>[828]). Instant alarm when activated, audible alarm at

default. This zone type generates an alarm when the system is armed

or disarmed.

060 – 24-Hour Non-Latching Tamper

This zone is always active and reports a tamper condition with no

audible alarm when opened or tamper/faulted.

066 – Momentary Keyswitch Arm

Often used with a keyswitch module*, turning the key alternately

arms and disarms the system and silences the alarms. Tampers and

faults only initiate their respective trouble sequence. The keypad

gives no indication when this zone type is activated.

NOTE: With audible alarm active, using the keyswitch when dis-

armed is the same as entering an access code at the keypad. Using the

keyswitch during the first 30 seconds of a delayed fire alarm is the

same as pressing a key at the keypad (the 90 second delay starts).

Activation of a keyswitch zone arms or disarms the system. Activa-

tion of this zone type is NOT logged nor is the Police code transmit-

ted. Bypassed zones of this type are not un-bypassed when the

system is disarmed. When the zone is bypassed, a zone bypass event

buffer log and communication occurs immediately, NOT when the

system is armed.

*Keyswitch module not for use in UL/ULC listed installations.

067 – Maintained Keyswitch Arm

Often used with a keyswitch module, turning the key arms the sys-

tem. The system cannot be disarmed by turning the key again. Tam-

pers and faults only initiate their respective trouble sequence.

Note: DO NOT use for wireless zones. Activation of the zone does

not log or transmit the Police code. Bypassed zones of this type are

not un-bypassed when the system is disarmed. When the zone is

bypassed, a zone bypass event buffer log and communication occurs

immediately, NOT when the system is armed.

With an audible alarm active, using the keyswitch when disarmed is

the same as entering an access code at the keypad. Activating this

zone type during the first 30 seconds of a delayed fire alarm is the

same as pressing a key at the keypad (the 90 second delay starts). If

left in the open state, the system does not arm until the zone is

restored and tripped again.

068 – Momentary Keyswitch Disarm

Use with a keyswitch module. Activating and restoring this zone dis-

arms the partition and silences alarms. Tampers or faults do not dis-

arm the zone.

Note: Do not use as a global zone.

069 – Maintained Keyswitch Disarm

Used with a maintained keyswitch. Activating this zone disarms the

partition.

Tampers or faults on this zone do not disarm the partition.

071 – Doorbell Zone

This zone type sounds a chime through keypads on the partition

when activated. No alarms are generated. Various chime tones can be

programmed. Disabling door chime on the partition also disables the

chime on this zone.

NOTE: Do not use as a global zone.

[002] Zone Attributes

Zone attributes are used to customize the operation of zones. When a

zone type (section [001]) is programmed, the default zone attribute is

automatically assigned.

When programming attributes using LED/ICON keypads:

Ready light ON: Program attributes [1-8]

Ready light and Armed light ON: Program attribute [9-16] (press [1]

for option 9, press [6] for option 14 etc.)

Press [9] to switch between attributes [1-8] and attributes [9-16].

NOTE: These attributes override default settings. Do NOT change

fire zone attributes from their default settings.

[001]-[128] Select Zone

The attributes listed below can be enabled and disabled for each

zone.

01 – Bell Audible

ON: An alarm activates the siren.

OFF: Silent alarm.

02 – Bell Steady

ON: Siren output is steady when in alarm.

OFF: Siren output pulses when in alarm.

03 – Door Chime

ON: The keypad chimes when the zone is open and when the zone is

secured.

OFF: The zone does not chime.

04 – Bypass Enabled

ON: The zone can be manually bypassed.

OFF: The zone cannot be bypassed.

05 – Force Arm

ON: The system can be armed with the zone open. The zone is tem-

porarily bypassed and, when secured, is monitored by the system.

OFF: The system cannot be armed if the zone is open.

06 – Swinger Shut Down

ON: When the zone goes into alarm for the number of times pro-

grammed in the Swinger Shutdown Counter (see page 47), it shuts

down with no further transmissions sent to the monitoring station.

The siren follows swinger shutdown if programmed.

OFF: Swinger shutdown is disabled. All alarms are transmitted.

07 – Transmission Delay

ON: Reporting of zone alarms is delayed for the programmed time in

section 377 (see page 48). If a valid access code is entered within this

time, no alarm signal is communicated.

OFF: When an alarm occurs, the reporting code is transmitted imme-

diately.

08 – Burglary Verification

ON: Enabled for cross zoning/police code. Zone alarms are not com-

municated until a burglary verified event occurs.

OFF: Not enabled for cross zoning/police code.

09 – Normally Closed (NC)

ON: The zone requires a normally closed loop.

OFF: The zone follows programming in section [013] option 2.

See note after option 11.

Section 5: Programming

10 – Single End of Line (SEOL) Resistors

ON: The zone requires a single end-of-line resistor (5.6K).

OFF: The zone follows programming in section [013] option 2.

See note after option 11.

11 – Double End of Line (DEOL)

ON: The zone requires two end-of-line resistors (5.6K).

OFF: The zone follows programming in section [013] option 2.

NOTE: If more than 1 option is enabled for options 09, 10, and 11

the lowest attribute number takes precedence. If options 09 and 10

are both enabled the zone follows the normally closed loop configu-

ration.

12 – Fast Loop/Normal Loop Response

ON: Follows a fast loop response of 50ms.

OFF: Follows a normal loop response as programmed in the Zone

Loop Response Time section.

5.3.3 System Times

This section describes how to program various timers applicable to

the entire alarm system.

[005] System Times

This is the base menu used by installers to program timers, including

system area [000], partition timers [001]-[008], and daylight saving

time [901]/[902]

[000] – System Area

Bell Cutoff Time:

System sirens follow this timer. Fire alarms follow this timer if sec-

tion [014] option 8 (Fire Bell Continues Option) is off. System tam-

pers follow this timer. The bell cutoff time is programmed in

minutes. Valid entries are 001 to 255 minutes.

Keypad buzzer alarms do not follow this timer.

Burglary Verification Timer:

If another zone with the Burglary Verification attribute enabled is

violated within the duration of this timer, a burglary verified event is

communicated and logged. “Burglary Verified” is displayed on the

keypad when the system is disarmed.

The burglary verification timer is programmed in minutes. Valid

entries are 000 to 255 minutes.

Zone Loop Response Time

Loop response time is a 3-digit entry from 005 to 255 programmed in

10ms increments. The minimum available loop response time is

50ms (e.g., program 005 for 50ms).

Automatic Clock Adjust

This value adds or subtracts seconds from the system clock at the end

of each day to compensate for inaccuracies. To determine the adjust-

ment value, monitor the time lost or gained by the alarm system over

a period of time and calculate the average gains or loses.

Example #1: The clock loses an average of 9 seconds per day. Pro-

gram the alarm controller to adjust the clock by 51 seconds for the

last minute of each day. This speeds up the alarm controller’s clock

by 9 seconds, correcting the problem.

Example #2: The clock gains an average of 11 seconds per day. Pro-

gram the alarm controller to adjust the clock by 71 seconds for the

last minute of each day. This slows down the alarm controller’s clock

by 11 seconds, correcting the problem.

If the Auto-arm time is set for 23:59, any change to the Clock Adjust

option will directly affect the Auto-arm pre-alert time.

[001]-[008] Partition 1-8 Timers

The following timers can be applied to each partition.

NOTE: For UL installations, the Entry Delay plus the Communica-

tions Delay must not exceed 60 seconds.

Entry Delay 1:

This value determines the entry delay time for delay 1 type zones.

Valid entries are 001 to 255 seconds.

Entry Delay 2:

This value determines the entry delay time for delay 2 type zones.

Valid entries are 001 to 255 seconds.

NOTE: The system follows the entry timer that activates first.

Exit Delay:

This value determines the exit delay time when arming the system.

During exit delay, both the Ready and Armed LEDs are on. When the

exit delay expires, both LEDs turn off.

[901]/[902] – Daylight Savings Begin/End

Daylight Begin [001] and Daylight End [002]:

Set the date and time daylight savings starts and ends.

Month

Valid entries are 001-012 (January to December).

Week

Valid entries are 000-005

Enter “000” to program a specific date (1-31) in the Day field. Enter

001-005 to program the specific week of the month. 005 is the last

week of the month.

Day

1-31 (if 000 is programmed in the Week field). 0-6 (Saturday-Sun-

day) if 001-005 is programmed in the Week field.

Hour

Valid entries are 0-23 hours. This is the time of day to advance or

turn the clock back.

Increment:

Valid entries are 1 or 2 hours. This is the number of hours to advance

or turn the clock back.

5.3.4 Access Codes

This section is used by installers to program the installer code, the

master code and the maintenance code. For information on program-

ming other access codes, see 4.7.5 [*][5] Program Access Codes on

page 19.

[006] Installer Defined Access Codes

This is the base menu used by installers to program the installer code

[001], the master code [002] and the maintenance code [003]. See

below for details.

[001] – Installer Code

This code is used by the installer to gain access to Installer Program-

ming [*][8]. Users with this access code have access to all levels of

system programming.

[002] – Master Code

This code is used by the master user, a person designated to perform

operational tasks beyond those of the standard user. The master code

provides access to functionality in the [*][5] and [*][6] menus.

[003] – Maintenance Code

This code is usually assigned temporarily to maintenance personnel

who must deactivate the alarm to enter the premises. The mainte-

nance code can arm and disarm the system, but does not grant access

to any other functionality.

Section 5: Programming

5.3.5 PGM Configuration

This section describes how to set up and configure programmable

outputs.

PGMs are used to send electrical current to external devices such as

lights and sirens, usually when an alarm event occurs. The alarm con-

troller provides up to three 50mA PGMs and one 300mA PGM.

PGM outputs can be expanded using the optional 8-output expander

(HSM2208) and the 4 high-current output expander (HSM2204).

Programming an output is a four-step process:

1. Program the PGM

2. Assign the PGM to a partition.

3. Assign an output attribute.

4. Assign an output option.

Refer to [011] PGM Config. Options on page 70 for PGM slot align-

ment.

[007] PGM Programming

This is the base menu used by the installer to assign PGMs to the

main bell and a partition.

[000] Main Bell Partition Assignment

This programming section is used to define which partitions activate

the main bell when they go into alarm. All partitions are selected by

default.

[001]-[164] PGM Partition Assignment

This option enables the installer to assign each PGM output to a par-

tition. To assign a PGM to a partition, first select the PGM output

(PGM 1-164), then select the partition (1-8).

NOTE: This field is only supported by PGM types that have multiple

partition capabilities (e.g., command outputs, away arming). It does

not affect system outputs (e.g., ground start pulse).

[008] PGM Timer Programming

[000] PGM Minutes/Seconds

This option determines if the timer is in minutes or seconds.

[001]-[164] PGM Timer

This timer programs the duration (in seconds or minutes) that PGMs

1-164 activate if programmed to follow the PGM Timer.

Select option 001-164 for PGM 1-164.

This option does not affect outputs programmed as Sensor Reset.

5.3.6 PGM Types

The output types described in this section can be assigned to alarm

controller and output expander module PGMs.

[009] PGM Types

Each alarm controller supports up to 2 or 4 PGMs and can be

expanded using HSM2208 output expander modules. PGM attributes

are defined in section [010] PGM Attributes on page 33. Program-

mable Output Attributes.

[001]-[164] Select PGM

100 – Null PGM

This option deactivates the PGM output.

101 – Burglary and Fire Bell Follower

This PGM output follows:

• Fire pre-alerts

• Temporal three fire signal (if enabled)

• All audible burglary and fire alarms by partition

• Bell cut-off time

• Bell squawk conditions

• Audible exit fault

This output activates when the alarm output is active and turns off

when the alarm output is silenced. The siren pattern matches the pro-

grammed cadence for the zone that went into alarm. Cadence priority

is as follows:

• fire alarm cadence

• CO alarm cadence

• other alarm cadences

This output will NOT follow bell squawks of any kind. The main

siren still activates for all alarms.

102 – Delayed Fire and Burglary

This output type operates the same as the Burglary and Fire Bell Fol-

lower (PGM type 01), but does not activate until the transmission

delay time expires.

When a zone with transmission delay enabled is tripped, the Bell,

Regular Fire and Burglary PGMs activate. At the end of the transmis-

sion delay, the delayed Fire and Burglary output activates.

This PGM is usually used to control outdoor sirens. If a false alarm

occurs, the user has time to disarm the system before the external

sirens activate.

NOTE: If a zone alarm occurs but does not follow transmission

delay, this PGM activates immediately, even if transmission delay is

active for a different zone alarm.

This output activates for audible exit fault and does not interfere with

the operation of any other programmable output.

103 – Sensor Reset [*][7][2]

This output is normally active and deactivates for 5 seconds when a

[*][7][2] fire reset command is entered or when an auto verify alarm

is detected. This option is used to reset power for latching smoke

detectors. The keypad buzzer does not sound for the 5-second period.

Refer to page 8 for instructions on wiring smoke detectors.

104 – 2-Wire Smoke

When this PGM is programmed, the onboard PGM functions as an

input instead of an output. 2-wire smoke detectors can be connected

to this input, which means that a zone input does not need to be used.

The PGM is also supervised, and a trouble condition is generated if a

2.2KΩ resistor is not present between the PGM terminal and Aux+.

The 2-wire smoke detector input creates an instant and latching

alarm.

109 – Courtesy Pulse

Courtesy pulse causes an output to activate for the entry and exit

times, plus 2 minutes. This option is typically used to activate a cour-

tesy light near the exit door for the duration of the entry/exit times.

111 – Keypad Buzzer Follow

PGM output activates with the keypad buzzer when triggered by the

events below. The PGM output remains active for the duration of the

keypad buzzer.

This PGM type does not activate for local key presses or trouble

beeps.

114 – Ready to Arm

This PGM activates when the system is ready to arm (all non-force

armed zones on the system are restored). The PGM output de-acti-

vates when an access code is entered to arm the system and the exit

delay begins. This PGM operates as described during walk test mode

(if all zones are restored).

• 24-hour supervisory buzzer

zone alarm

• No activity arm pre-alert

• Entry delay • Audible exit fault

• Audible exit delay • Door chime

Section 5: Programming

115 – System Armed Status

This output activates when all selected partitions are armed (end of

the exit delay) in either Stay or Away modes. The output de-activates

when the system is disarmed.

116 – Away Armed Status

This PGM switches on at the beginning of exit delay when the sys-

tem is armed with stay/away zones activated. If the system is armed

with the stay/away zones always active, then the away output is

active.

117 – Stay Armed Status

This PGM output activates if the system is armed with the stay/away

zones bypassed.

120 – Away Armed with No Zone Bypasses Status

When assigned to a single partition, this PGM output activates when

the system is armed with stay/away and night zones active, and no

zones are bypassed.

If assigned to multiple partitions, all partitions must be armed in

away mode with no bypassed zones before the PGM activates. If a

force armable zone is violated at the time of arming, the PGM does

not activate. When the zone is restored, the PGM activates.

121-124 – Command Outputs 1-4

Command Outputs 1-4 are user-activated by entering [*] [7] [1-4] at

any keypad. When an output is activated, three acknowledgment

beeps are sounded.

PGM outputs of this type can be programmed to follow a pre-defined

schedule (programmed in section [601]-[604] Programming Sched-

ule 1-4 on page 52). Even if the output follows a schedule it can be

manually turned ON, OFF or follow the schedule through [*][7].

To select a schedule for these PGM outputs to follow, see [009]

PGM Types on page 31.

129 – Partition Status Alarm Memory

This feature is intended to be used on a keyswitch plate, with a light

controlled by this PGM to indicate system status. The output acti-

vates (steady) at the beginning of exit delay when the partition is

armed. If an alarm occurs on the armed partition, the output flashes

for the remainder of the armed period. If an alarm occurs on a dis-

armed partition (24 Hr Zone), the output flashes until the alarm is

acknowledged.

This output will not activate during a walk test or for FMP key,

holdup or audible/silent PGM2 input alarms.

132 – Holdup Output

When a Holdup zone (Type [42]) goes into alarm, this output acti-

vates until the partition is either armed (access code, keyswitch,

[*][0], etc.) or disarmed. A tamper or fault on a holdup zone type

does not activate this output. This output does not activate In Walk

Test mode. If a global holdup alarm occurs, each partition with

holdup zones assigned must be armed or disarmed before the holdup

output deactivates. If holdup alarms occur on multiple partitions, an

access code must be entered at each partition before the output deac-

tivates.

NOTE: Not for use with UL/ULC listed installations.

134 – 24-Hour Silent Input (PGM 2)

With this input the keypad does not indicate an alarm, the siren

remains silent, and the signal is sent to the central station. This input

does not follow swinger shutdown. A 2.2K EOL resistor is required

for this input (to Aux+). If a short or open occurs, an alarm is gener-

ated.

Not for use with UL installations.

135 – 24-Hour Audible Input (PGM 2)

LCD keypads indicate that the system is in alarm, the siren sounds

for the duration of bell timeout, and the signal is sent to the central

station. This input does not follow swinger shutdown. A 2.2K EOL

resistor is required for this input (to Aux+). If a short or open occurs,

an alarm is generated for all partitions and sirens. PGM partition

assignment does not affect this PGM type.

146 – TLM and Alarm

This output activates when a telephone line fault condition is present

AND an alarm occurs. The output remains active until an access code

is entered to disarm or the TLM trouble is restored. The output acti-

vates for all audible and silent alarms (except duress) if a TLM trou-

ble is present. If an alarm activates this output in the disarmed state, it

will deactivate when the system is armed or the telephone line is

restored. This output type also activates if alarms are in memory (not

only for currently active alarms) when the TLM fault occurs. The

alarms in memory must have exceeded the bell timeout.

147 – Kissoff

This PGM output activates for two seconds after the alarm system

receives a kissoff signal from the central station.

148 – Ground Start

This output activates for two seconds before the alarm system

attempts dialing to obtain a dial tone on Ground Start telephone

equipment. Two 2-second pauses must be inserted at the beginning of

the telephone number when using this option.

149 – Alternate Communicator

This output can be used to notify the home owner, before they enter

the premises, that an alarm has occurred. This output can be pro-

grammed to activate when any of the following system events

(alarms) occur on the system:

• Fire (Fire Key, Fire Zones)

• Panic (Panic Key and Panic Zones)

• Burglary (Delay, Instant, Interior, Stay/Away and 24-hour Bur-

glary Zones)

• Opening/Closing Events

• Zone Auto-Bypass. (Please see 08 – Zone Auto-Bypass on page

35 for details).

• Medical (Medical Key, Medical and Emergency Zones)

• Burglary Verified

• Opening After Alarm

• Emergency Alarm

• Duress Alarm

In the armed state, this output deactivates when the system is dis-

armed. If an alarm activates this output in the disarmed state, the out-

put deactivates if a valid access code is entered within the bell

timeout or if the system is armed after the bell timeout has expired.

This output activates for silent and audible alarms or medical condi-

tions only. It will not activate during pre-alert or delays.

NOTE: The PGM attributes for this option, programmed in section

[010], differ from the standard selection of attributes normally pro-

grammed.

155 – System Trouble

This output can be programmed to activate when any of the follow-

ing trouble conditions are present:

• Service Required

• Loss of Clock

• DC Trouble

• Bus Voltage

• AC Trouble

• Device Fault

• Device Low Battery

• Device Tamper

• RF Delinquency

• Module Supervisory

• Module Tamper

• Communications

Section 5: Programming

• Not Networked

This output deactivates when all of the selected trouble conditions

are cleared.

156 – Latched System Event (Strobe)

This output can be used to notify the home owner, before they enter

the premises, that an alarm has occurred. This output can be pro-

grammed to activate when any of the following alarms occur on the

system:

• Burglary (Delay, Instant, Interior, Stay/Away and 24-Hour Bur-

glary Zones)

• Fire (Fire Key, Fire Zones)

• Panic (Panic Key and Panic Zones)

• Medical (Medical Key, Medical and Emergency Zones)

• Supervisory (Supervisory, Freezer and Water Zones)

• Priority (Gas, Heat, Sprinkler and 24-Hour Latching Zones)

• Holdup (Holdup zones)

• Output follows pulse timer (section [008] PGM Timer Pro-

gramming on page 31).

This output does not activate during pre-alert or delays.

In the armed state, the output deactivates only once the system is dis-

armed.

If an alarm activates this output in the disarmed state, the output

deactivates when a user enters a valid access code during bell time-

out. The output also deactivates if someone arms the system after the

bell timeout has expired.

If assigned to a single partition, the output activates when an enabled

alarm event occurs on the assigned partition. When assigned to mul-

tiple partitions, the output activates when an alarm occurs on any par-

tition and, if configured to latch, will deactivate when any partition is

disarmed. (or a valid disarming procedure is used).

157 – System Tamper

This output activates when any tamper condition is present and deac-

tivates when all tamper conditions are cleared (if set for steady oper-

ation). If set for a pulsed operation, the output deactivates when the

PGM Output timer expires. These tampers include zone tampers

(DEOL), case tampers, TLM trouble, RF jam, and all zone and

device tampers.

161 – DC Trouble

This output activates when one of the following low battery condi-

tions is detected:

• Alarm controller low or absent battery

• Module low or absent battery

• Wireless zone low battery

• Wireless keypad low battery

• Wireless siren low battery

• Wireless key low battery

The output can be configured to follow the state of the low battery

trouble(s) or it can activate for a period of time and automatically

restore.

165 – Proximity Tag Used

This output activates when the selected proximity tag is presented.

Assign this output to a user by entering a user number from 001 to

095. To enable this attribute for all proximity tags, enter 000 in PGM

attribute [011]. See [011] PGM Configuration Options on page 37.

175 – Bell Status and Programming Access Output

This PGM activates when the siren, Installer Programming mode or

DLS/SA is active. It deactivates after bell timeout, when Installer

Programming is exited or when DLS/SA programming is discon-

nected.

176 – Remote Operation

This output is activated and deactivated remotely on command from

DLS software.

NOTE: Not for use with UL/ULC listed installations.

184 – Open After Alarm

This output activates when the system has been disarmed after an

alarm. It deactivates when a valid user code is entered or when the

PGM Output timer expires.

200 – Zone Follower - PGM By Zone

This option allows the PGM to activate when the assigned zone is

opened and deactivate when the zone is restored or, if programmed,

when a valid access code is entered. This PGM follows the state of

the assigned zone, regardless of the partition the zone or PGM is

assigned to.

To program which zone the PGM will follow, see [011] PGM Con-

figuration Options on page 37.

201-216 – Zone Follower (Zones 1-128)

This output type is assigned to a group of zones and is normally acti-

vated, but deactivates when a zone is tripped. Zones are assigned to

this output in the following groups:

If multiple zones are enabled, any active zone in that group triggers

the output. The PGM will not activate again until all zones are

restored.

[010] PGM Attributes

The following options are used to program the operating characteris-

tics of the main bell and PGM outputs.

[000] Main Bell Mask

This programming section is used to configure the types of audible

alarms that trigger the main bell output on the alarm controller. All

options are selected by default.

Fire Alarm

ON: Fire alarm ([F] key, Fire zones) activates the main siren.

OFF: Fire alarm does not activate the main siren.

CO Alarm

ON: CO alarm activates the main siren.

OFF: CO alarm does not activate the main siren.

Burglary Alarm

ON: Burglary alarm (Delay, Instant, Interior, Stay/Away, Night, Inte-

rior Delay, Instant Stay/Away, Day, 24-hour Burglary) activates the

main siren.

OFF: Burglary alarm does not activate the main siren.

24-Hour Flood Alarm

ON: Main bell activates in the event of a 24-Hour Flood alarm.

OFF: Main bell does not activate in the event of a 24-Hour Flood

alarm.

Bell Squawks

ON: Squawks activate the main siren. Bell squawks must be enabled

to use the following options:

• Bell Squawk on arm (single)

• Bell Squawk on disarm (double)

• Bell Duration Auto-Arm (single every second)

201 – Zones 1-8 209 – Zones 65-72

202 – Zones 9-16 210 – Zones 73-80

203 – Zones 17-24 211 – Zones 81-88

204 – Zones 25-32 212 – Zones 89-96

205 – Zones 33-40 213 – Zones 97-104

206 – Zones 41-48 214 – Zones 105-112

207 – Zones 49-56 215 – Zones 113-120

208 – Zones 57-64 216 – Zones 121-128

Section 5: Programming

• Bell Squawk on Exit (single every second)

• Bell Squawk on Entry (single every second)

• Bell Squawk on Trouble (single every 10 seconds)

OFF: Squawks do not activate the main siren.

[001]-[164] PGM 1-28 Attributes

The following PGM attributes can be assigned to a PGM. Each attri-

bute has various toggle options, depending on the PGM type selected

(section [009]).

101 – Fire and Burglary

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

102 – Delay Fire and Burglary

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

103 – Sensor Reset [*][7][2]

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

03 – Access Code Required / No Code Required

ON – Access code required for activation

OFF – No access code required for activation

109 – Courtesy Pulse

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

111 – Keypad Buzzer Follow

01 – True Output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation, activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation, deactivated when

triggered.

02 – Timed Output / Latched Output

ON: output remains active until an access code is entered or cer-

tain criteria have been met, depending on the PGM type.

OFF: output remains active until the PGM output timer expires.

09 – Entry Delay

ON: activates on entry delay.

OFF: does not activate on entry.

10 – Exit Delay

ON: activates on exit delay.

OFF: does not activate on exit delay.

11 – Door Chime

ON: activates when chime is enabled.

OFF: does not activate when chime is enabled.

12 – Keypad Buzzer Zone

ON: activates when keypad buzzer goes into alarm.

OFF: does not activate when keypad buzzer goes into alarm.

13 – Audible Exit Fault

ON: activates when audible exit fault pre-alert begins.

OFF: does not activate when audible exit fault pre-alert begins.

14 – Auto-Arm Pre-Alert

ON: activates when auto-arming pre-alert begins.

OFF: does not activate when auto-arming pre-alert begins.

114 – Ready To Arm

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

115 – Armed Status

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

116 – Armed Away Mode

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

117 – Armed Stay Mode

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

121-124 – Command Output 1-4

01 – True Output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation, activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation, deactivated when

triggered.

02 – Timed Output / Latched Output

ON: output remains active until an access code is entered or

certain criteria have been met, depending on the PGM type.

OFF: output remains active until the PGM output timer expires.

03 - Access Code Required / No Code Required

ON – Access Code Required for Activation

OFF – No Access Code Required for Activation

129 – Partition Status Alarm Memory

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

132 – Holdup Output

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

146 – TLM Alarm

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

147 – Kissoff Output

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

148 – Ground Start

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when triggered.

OFF: active during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

149 – Alternate Communicator

01 – True Output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation, activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation, deactivated when

triggered.

02 – Timed Output / Latched Output

ON: output remains active until an access code is entered or cer-

tain criteria have been met, depending on the PGM type.

OFF: output remains active until the PGM output timer expires.

04 – Fire Alarm

Section 5: Programming

ON: activates with fire alarm, [F] key, fire zones, 2-wire smoke.

OFF: does not activate with fire alarm.

05 – Panic Alarm

ON: activates with panic alarm, [P] key, panic zones.

OFF: does not activate with panic alarm.

06 – Burglary Alarm

ON: activates with burglary alarm.

OFF: does not activate with burglary alarm.

07 – Open/Close

ON: activates with opening or closing.

OFF: does not activate with opening or closing.

08 – Zone Auto-Bypass

ON: activates when a zone is automatically bypassed.

OFF: does not activate when a zone is automatically bypassed.

09 – Medical Alarm

ON: activates with medical alarm, [+] key, medical zones.

OFF: does not activate with medical alarm.

10 – Burglary Verified

ON: activates with burglary verified alarm (or police code).

OFF: does not activate with burglary verified alarm.

11 – Open After Alarm

ON: activates when the system is disarmed with an alarm in

memory.

OFF: does not activate when the system is disarmed with an

alarm in memory.

12 – Emergency Alarm

ON: activates with zone emergency alarm.

OFF: does not activate with zone emergency alarm.

13 – Duress Alarm

ON: activates with duress alarm.

OFF: does not activate with duress alarm.

155 – System Trouble

01 – True Output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation, activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation, deactivated when

triggered.

02 – Timed Output / Latched Output

ON: output remains active until an access code is entered or cer-

tain criteria have been met, depending on the PGM type.

OFF: output remains active until the PGM output timer expires.

04 – Service Required

ON: activates on service required trouble condition.

OFF: does not activate on service required trouble condition.

05 – Loss of Clock

ON: activates on loss of clock trouble condition.

OFF: does not activate on loss of clock trouble condition.

06 – DC Trouble

ON: activates if a panel low or no battery trouble is detected, or

if an HSM2204/2300 1-4 low or no battery trouble is detected.

OFF: does not activate on DC Trouble condition.

07 – Bus Voltage

ON: activates when a system module has measured a low Aux

voltage.

OFF: does not activate for a module low voltage trouble.

08 – AC Trouble

ON: activates when any system device detects an AC Failure

condition.

OFF: does not activate for AC Failure conditions.

09 – Device Fault

ON: activates if one of the following device fault conditions is

present:

• zone 001 – 128 fault

• keypad 01 -16 fault

• siren 01 – 16 fault

• repeater 01 – 08 fault

• fire trouble

• CO trouble

• gas trouble

• heat trouble

• freeze trouble

• probe disconnected trouble

OFF: does not activate if a device fault condition is present.

10 – Device Low Battery

ON: activates if any of the following device low battery condi-

tions is present:

• zone 001 – 128

• keypad 01 – 16

• siren 01 – 16

• repeater 01 – 08

• user 01 – 32 (wireless keys)

OFF: does not activate if a device low battery condition is pres-

ent.

11 – Device Tamper

ON: activates if any of the following device tamper conditions

is present:

• zone 001 – 128

• keypad 01 – 16

• siren 01 – 16

• repeater 01 – 08

OFF – does not activate if a device tamper condition is present.

12 – RF Delinquency

ON: activates if any of the following RF delinquency troubles is

detected:

• zone 001 – 128

• keypad 01 – 16

• siren 01 – 16

• repeater 01 – 08

OFF – does not activate if an RF delinquency condition is pres-

ent.

13 – Module Supervisory

ON – activates if any of the following module supervisory trou-

bles is detected:

• HSM2HOST

• keypad 01 – 16

• zone expander 01 – 15

• HSM2204 1 – 4

• HSM2300 1 – 4

• HSM2208 01 – 16

OFF – does not activate if a module supervisory trouble is

detected.

14 – Module Tamper

ON – activates if any of the following module tamper conditions

is present:

• HSM2HOST

• Keypad 01 – 16

• Zone expander 01 – 15

• HSM2204 1 – 4

• HSM2300 1 – 4

• HSM2208 01 – 16 tamper troubles

OFF – does not activate if a module tamper condition is present.

15 – Communications

ON – activates if any of the following communications condi-

tions is present:

• TLM trouble

• FTC receiver 1 – 4

• SIM Lock trouble

• Cellular Trouble

• Ethernet Trouble

Section 5: Programming

• Receiver 1 – 4 absent

• Receiver 1 – 4 supervision trouble

• SMS Configuration trouble

• Alt comm. Fault.

OFF – does not activate if a communications trouble condition

is present.

16: – Not Networked

ON – activates if any of the following not networked conditions

is present:

• Zone 001 – 128

• Keypad 01 – 16

• Siren 01 – 16

• Repeater 01 – 08

• User 01 – 95 (wireless keys) not networked troubles

OFF – does not activate if a not networked trouble condition is

present

156 – Latched System Event

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation. Deactivated when

triggered.

02 – Timed Output / Latched Output

ON: output remains active until the PGM output timer expires.

OFF: output remains active until an access code is entered or

certain criteria have been met, depending on the PGM type.

04 – Fire Alarm

ON: activates with fire alarm, [F] key, fire zones, 2-wire smoke.

OFF: does not activate with fire alarm.

05 – Panic Alarm

ON: activates on panic alarm (audible or silent).

OFF: does not activate on panic alarm.

06 – Burglary Alarm

ON: activates on burglary alarm.

OFF: does not activate on burglary alarm.

07 – Medical Alarm

ON: activates on medical alarm.

OFF: does not activate on medical alarm.

08 – Supervisory

ON: activates on supervisory alarm.

OFF: does not activate on supervisory alarm.

09 – Priority Event

ON: activates on priority alarm.

OFF: does not activate on priority alarm.

10 – Holdup

ON: activates on Holdup alarm.

OFF: does not activate on Holdup alarm.

11 – Duress Alarm

ON: activates on duress alarm.

OFF: does not activate on duress alarm.

12 – Emergency Alarm

ON: activates on emergency alarm.

OFF: does not activate on emergency alarm.

13 – Fire Supervisory

ON: activates on fire supervisory alarm.

OFF: does not activate on fire supervisory alarm.

14 – Fire Trouble

ON: activates on fire trouble condition.

OFF: does not activate on fire trouble condition.

15– CO Alarm

ON: activates on CO alarm.

OFF: does not activate on CO alarm.

157 – System Tamper

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation. Deactivated when

triggered.

09 – System/Module Tampers

ON: activates when any module tamper condition occurs.

OFF: does not activate when any module tamper condition

occurs.

10 – Zone Tampers

ON: activates when any zone tamper condition occurs.

OFF: does not activate when zone tamper conditions occur.

161 – DC Trouble

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation. Deactivated when

triggered.

02 – PGM Timer

ON: output remains active until an access code is entered or cer-

tain criteria have been met, depending on the PGM type.

OFF: output remains active until the PGM output timer expires.

09 – Battery Low

ON: activates when a low battery trouble occurs.

OFF: does not activate when a low battery trouble occurs.

10 – Battery Absent

ON: activates when a battery absent trouble occurs.

OFF: does not activate when a battery absent trouble occurs.

165 – Prox Used

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation. Deactivated when triggered.

175 – Bell Prog Access

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation. Deactivated when trig-

gered.

176 – Remote Operation

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation. Deactivated when trig-

gered.

184 – Open After Alarm

01 – True output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation. Deactivated when trig-

gered.

201 – 216 Zone Follower Zones 1-128

01 – True Output/Inverted

ON: deactivated during normal operation. Activated when

triggered.

OFF: activated during normal operation. Deactivated when

triggered.

02 – Timed Output / Latched Output

ON: output remains active until an access code is entered or cer-

tain criteria have been met, depending on the PGM type.

OFF: output remains active until the PGM output timer expires.

09-016 – Zone Terminals 1-8

ON: zones associated with terminals 1-16 are enabled for zone

follower operation.

Section 5: Programming

OFF: zones are not enabled for zone follower operation.

[011] PGM Configuration Options

This section is used to configure PGM types that offer multiple

options.

[001]-[164] Select PGM

The following options may be selected for each PGM:

Zone Follow PGM By Zone

This option is used to specify the zone that PGM type 200 follows.

Enter 000-128 to select zone 1-128.

Proximity Tag Used

This option is used to define which proximity tag will activate PGM

outputs programmed as [165] Prox Used. Enter 000 to enable this

PGM attribute for all user proximity tags, or enter user number 002-

095 to have this attribute activated by a specific user proximity tag.

Command Output 1-4

This option is used to assign a schedule, programmed in section

[601]-[604], for the command output PGMs to follow.

[012] System Lockout

Keypad Lockout – Number of Invalid Local Attempts

This option controls the number of invalid access code entries

allowed before the keypad is locked.

When keypad lockout occurs, the system is inaccessible by keypad

for the programmed duration. If the number of invalid attempts is not

reached within one hour, or if a valid access code is entered, the

counter is reset to 0. Valid entries are 000 to 255 minutes. Entering

000 disables the feature. Presenting an invalid tag counts toward key-

pad lockout.

Keypad Lockout Duration

This programming option determines the length of time the keypad is

locked out for. If the system cold starts while in keypad lockout, the

lockout is removed. Valid entries are 000 to 255 minutes. Entering

000 disables keypad lockout.

Remote Lockout DLS

This programming option determines the number of invalid access

code entries allowed via SMS or DLS before remote access is locked

out for the programmed duration (see below). If the number of

invalid attempts is not reached within one hour, or if a valid access

code is entered through SMS or DLS, the counter is reset to 0. The

valid entries are 003 to 255 attempts. Default is 6 attempts.

NOTE: DLS tries to connect using the programmed DLS Access

code first and, if unsuccessful, using the default DLS access code.

Two failed attempts are counted if both codes are incorrect.

Remote Lockout Duration

This programming option determines how long the remote lockout

lasts for. If the system cold starts while in remote lockout, the lockout

restarts for the programmed duration. Valid entries are 001 to 255

minutes. Entering 000 disables remote lockout.

5.3.7 System Options

[013] System Option 1

1 – NC Loop/EOL

ON: All zones are wired as normally closed circuits with returns con-

nected to a COM terminal. The end-of-line resistor is not required.

An alarm is generated when the circuit is opened.

OFF: All zones must be wired with an end-of-line resistor configura-

tion, determined by option 2 below.

NOTE: The valid EOL value is 5600 Ohms (5.6K).

2 – DEOL/SEOL

ON: All zones use Double-End-of-Line resistors, except Standard

Fire, Delayed Fire, Auto-Verified Fire, Co and Supervisory zone

types. DEOL resistors enable detection of zone faults and tampers.

The tamper resistor (5.6K) is placed in parallel across the alarm

activating device, and the single EOL resistor (5.6K) is placed

between the alarm and tamper contacts.

This allows detection of zone faults (shorted zone), tampers (open

zone), alarms (11.2K), and restored zones (5.6K).

If the zone is disarmed and placed in the tamper or fault state, trouble

beeps sound on all system keypads until a key is pressed on each par-

tition. A zone tamper is sent to the monitoring station if programmed.

If the zone is armed and a tamper is activated, the tamper alarm and

zone alarm are logged and transmitted.

OFF: All zones must have a 5.6K resistor. If the zone is shorted or

open, it is in the tripped state. If the zone is open and programmed as

a fire zone, it is in the trouble state. The EOL and DEOL zone attri-

butes override this system option.

NOTE: Zone Faults (Supervisories) on wireless zones do not cause

an audible alarm while armed.

3 – Show All Troubles When Armed

ON: The Trouble LED illuminates when troubles are present on the

system in both the armed and disarmed state.

OFF: The Trouble LED illuminates for all troubles while disarmed,

but only for Fire Troubles while armed.

4 – Tamper/Faults Do Not Show As Open

ON: The zone LED does not illuminate if the zone is in the tamper or

fault states. Only the Trouble LED illuminates.

OFF: The respective zone LED illuminates if the zone is in the tam-

per or fault states. The Trouble LED also illuminates.

5 – Auto-Arm Schedule in [*][6]

ON: The auto-arm schedules ([151] - [158]) are accessible to install-

ers via [*][6] as well as Installer Programming.

OFF: The auto-arm schedules ([151] - [158]) are only accessible to

installers via Installer Programming.

NOTE: This toggle controls access for all eight partitions.

6 – Audible Exit Fault

ON: If a delay type zone is violated after the exit delay has expired,

an entry delay warning is sounded through the keypad and siren indi-

cating that an improper exit was made. If the alarm system is dis-

armed within the entry delay period no signal is sent.

OFF: The entry delay warning is sounded only through the keypad.

7 – Event Buffer Follows Swinger

ON: Once an event reaches its swinger shutdown limit programmed

in section [377] Communication Variables on page 47, it will no lon-

ger log events to the event buffer until the swinger shutdown is reset.

This avoids filling the event buffer with false events.

OFF: The event buffer continues to log events to the buffer even after

the event has gone into swinger shutdown.

8 – Temporal Three Fire Signaling

ON: All fire bells sound in the temporal three pattern. Cadence is as

follows: (500ms ON, 500ms OFF, 500ms ON, 500ms OFF, 500ms

ON, 1.5 sec. OFF).

OFF: All fire bells will sound with the standard 1 second on/1 second

off fire bell cadence.

NOTE: Must be on for UL/ULC installations.

Section 5: Programming

[014] System Option 2

1 – Bell Squawk

ON: The siren emits a single squawk when armed in any manner,

including Auto-arm, and a double squawk when disarmed.

When the system is disarmed, the siren emits a series of three squawk

pairs to indicate alarms in memory.

OFF: The siren does not squawk when arming or disarming.

NOTE: For UL/ULC, must be enabled if wireless keys are used with

the alarm system.

2 – Bell Squawk on Auto-Arm

ON: The siren squawks once every 10 seconds during the auto-arm

pre-alert time.

OFF: The siren does not squawk during auto-arm pre-alert.

3 – Bell Squawk On Exit

ON: The siren squawks once per second during exit delay, changing

to 3 squawks per second for the final 10 seconds.

OFF: The siren does not squawk for exit delay conditions.

4 – Bell Squawk On Entry

ON: The siren pulses with the same timing as the keypad buzzer

during entry delay, changing to 3 squawks per second for the final 10

seconds.

OFF: The siren does not activate during entry delay.

5 – Bell Squawk On Trouble

ON: When a trouble condition exists on the system, the siren

squawks 2 times every 10 seconds (as per the keypad buzzer).

The siren is silenced when the keypad beeps are silenced (any key

pressed on keypad).

OFF: The siren does not activate with a trouble condition.

6 – Not Used

7 – Exit Delay Termination

ON: The exit delay is reduced to 5 seconds once a Delay 1 zone is

restored. Force-Arm Delay 1 type zones also end the exit delay.

OFF: The exit delay timer continues to count even after the delay

zone is restored.

All audible options associated with the exit delay function are

silenced until the time programmed for the exit delay has elapsed.

8 – Fire Bell Continues

ON: For all Fire type alarms, the siren sounds until an access code is

entered to silence the alarm or disarm the system regardless of the

time programmed for bell timeout.

OFF: For all Fire type alarms, the siren sounds for the length of Bell

Timeout or until an access code is entered.

NOTE: Must be disabled for ULC installations.

[015] System Option 3

1 – [F] Key Enabled

ON: Pressing and holding the [F] key for 2 seconds triggers a Fire

alarm.

OFF: The [F] key does not sound or report an alarm when pressed.

NOTE: Use only for residential fire installations.

2 – [P] Key Enabled

ON: When a valid [P] key alarm is generated, the keypad buzzer

emits a series of 3 beeps to acknowledge the alarm and the siren

sounds for the length of bell timeout.

OFF: When a valid [P] key alarm is generated, the keypad buzzer and

the siren are silent, but the alarm is still transmitted (if programmed).

NOTE: Fire, Medical, and Panic key transmissions follow the parti-

tion 1 alarm/restore call direction options (Fire, Medical, and Panic

key). The Fire, Medical, Panic keys operate even if keypad blanking

and keypad lockout are active.

3 – Quick Exit

ON: When the system is armed, users may enter the [*][0] command

to temporarily bypass a single Delay 1 or Delay 2 zone to exit the

premises. Only one delay zone may be activated. Activity on another

delay zone initiates the appropriate alarm sequence. If the delay zone

is still open two minutes after the [*][0] command is entered, entry

delay is initiated. If armed in the Stay mode, the automatic bypass on

Stay/Away zones remains.

OFF: When the system is armed, users can not perform a quick exit

using [*][0].

4 – Quick Arming /Function Key

ON: [*][0] arming and Stay/Away function keys may be used to arm

the system without the entry of a valid access code.

OFF: [*][0] arming is not permitted. All arming functions require the

entry of an access code to activate (including Stay/Away keys).

5 – Not Used

6 – Master Code Not User Changeable

ON: The master code (access code 01) may not be changed by the

user and may only be programmed in Installer Programming.

OFF: The master code may be programmed by the user using the

[*][5][Master Code] command. The master code may also be pro-

grammed in Installer Programming.

7 – Telephone Line Monitor Enable

ON: The TLM function is active and the system indicates a trouble

condition when using the [*][2] View Trouble Conditions command.

OFF: The TLM function is deactivated and telephone line troubles

are not indicated by the system.

NOTE: Must be ON for UL/ULC listed installations.

8 – Telephone Line Monitor Audible When Armed

ON: When the system is disarmed, a telephone line monitor trouble

generates a trouble indication as described above. If the system is

armed, a telephone line monitor trouble generates an audible alarm

on the siren for the duration programmed for bell timeout or until an

access code is entered to disarm.

OFF: Telephone line troubles generate a trouble indication, the Trou-

ble LED illuminates, and the keypad buzzer beeps until a key is

pressed.

[016] System Option 4

1 – AC Trouble Display

ON: If AC power fails, the condition is reported to the monitoring

station and is indicated as a trouble condition on the system keypads.

OFF: If AC power fails, the condition is reported, but the Trouble

light on the system keypads is off. The trouble is displayed in [*][2].

NOTE: Must be ON for UL/ULC listed installations.

2 – AC Trouble Light Flashes

ON: When AC power is lost, the Trouble light flashes in the base

“Ready” and “Armed” mode within 30 seconds of power loss. When

AC restores, the Trouble light stops flashing within 30 seconds. If

enabled, this option overrides the AC display option.

OFF: When AC power is lost, the Trouble light illuminates but does

not flash.

Section 5: Programming

3 – Keypad Blanking

ON: If no keys are pressed for 30 seconds, all keypad lights except

backlighting (if enabled) are shut off until the next keypress, entry

delay, audible alarm or keypad buzzer condition.

Keypad function keys still operate when the keypad is blank, unless

the function key is programmed to require an access code. Keypad

Blanking While Armed overrides this feature. When a partition is

armed and in alarm, entering a code to remove blanking silences the

alarm and disarms the system.

OFF: The keypad lights remain ON at all times.

4 – Keypad Blanking Requires Code

ON: A valid access code must be entered before a blanked keypad

can be used.

OFF: Pressing any key on a blanked keypad removes keypad blank-

ing.

5 – Keypad Backlighting

ON: All keypads on the system have backlighting on at all times.

OFF: All keypads on the system have backlighting off.

6 – Power Save Mode

ON: If AC power fails, all keypad lights including backlighting are

shut OFF. The keypad lights come back ON after a keypress, entry

delay, audible alarm or keypad buzzer condition (except door chime).

Keypad lights return to the off state after 30 seconds of inactivity.

OFF: If AC power fails, keypads do not go into power save mode.

7 – Bypass Display When Armed

ON: The Bypass status light is on if zones are bypassed when the sys-

tem is armed.

OFF: The Bypass light is on only while the system is disarmed to

indicate that zones on the system are bypassed. When the system is

armed, the Bypass light is off.

The Bypass status light is on if Stay/Away zones are auto bypassed at

the time of arming regardless of whether or not this option is enabled.

This option only enables and disables manual bypass display.

8 – Keypad Tampers Enabled

ON: All keypads containing tamper switches generate tamper alarms

and restores.

OFF: The tamper switches on all keypads do not generate tamper

alarms.

NOTE: If this option is used, all keypads should be properly

installed and secured (tamper restored) before enabling the option.

NOTE: Must be ON for UL/ULC commercial burglary listed instal-

lations.

[017] System Option 5

1 – Chime on Opening

ON: When a zone with the door chime attribute ON is opened, the

system keypads and sirens (if enabled) sound door chime beeps.

OFF: When a zone with the door chime attribute ON is opened, the

system keypads and sirens (if enabled) do not sound door chime

beeps.

2 – Chime on Closing

ON: When a zone with the door chime attribute ON is closed, the

system keypads and sirens (if enabled) sound door chime beeps.

OFF: When a zone with the door chime attribute ON is closed, the

system keypads and sirens (if enabled) do not sound door chime

beeps.

4 – Multi Hit

ON: Alarms from the same zone within the Burglary Verification

Timer duration cause the police code or burglary verified to be

logged and transmitted. The number of zone trips required to create a

confirmed alarm depends on the value of the programmable burglary

verification counter.

OFF: Alarms from the same zone within the Burglary Verification

Timer duration do not cause the police code or burglary verified to be

logged and transmitted.

NOTE: This feature only applies to zones defined as Interior, Inte-

rior Delay, Interior Stay/Away, Instant Stay/Away, Delay Stay/Away,

or Night Zones (PIR Zones).

5 – Late to Close

ON: Provides an audible warning if the alarm system has not been

armed by a programmed time of day but does not arm the alarm sys-

tem. The alarm system communicates and logs a Late to Close event

at the end of the Auto-arm/Postpone pre-alert for each partition.

OFF: The alarm system will neither communicate nor log a Late to

Close event at the time programmed for Auto-arm for each partition.

NOTE: If the Auto-arm toggle option is disabled, the Auto-arm Pre-

alert still occurs when a time is programmed for that day (if enabled)

and the event is logged and communicated. This option does not

directly affect the functionality of Auto-arm. If Late to Close is

enabled and Auto-arming is not, LCD keypads display “System

Arming in Progress” during the Late to Close Pre-alert.

6 – Daylight Savings Time

ON: The alarm system adjusts between Daylight and Standard times

according to the times programmed in System Timers ([005] options

001-002).

NOTE: Auto-arm and Test Transmissions should not be attempted

between 0200 and 0300 hours, as they will be missed during a day-

light savings clock adjust. Events programmed to occur between

0100 and 0200 will occur twice during a daylight savings clock

adjust. Daylight Savings Time programming should not conflict with

the Auto-arm and Test Transmissions programming.

OFF: The alarm system makes no automatic time adjustments for

Daylight Saving time.

7 – Not Used

8 – Bell Squawk on Away Arm/ Disarm Only

ON: Bell Squawks are only heard when away arming, as well as

when disarming from Away mode. This feature prevents the siren

from activating when arming in stay and night modes.

OFF: Bell Squawks are heard during all types of arming and disarm-

ing.

NOTE: This option follows the “Bell Squawk Attribute” features if

they are enabled.

[018] System Option 6

1 – Test Transmission Exception

ON: The alarm system does not send a test transmission if a transmis-

sion was sent to the receiver within the programmed interval as set in

section [377] > [003] – Periodic Test Transmission Cycle on page 48.

OFF: Test transmissions are always sent at the programmed interval.

2 – Real-Time Bypass Reporting

ON: When a non-24-hour zone is bypassed in [*][1], the system

immediately logs and communicates the bypass status of the zone.

Global Zones: 24-hour and non-24 hour zone bypasses are logged

and communicated in real time. Non-24 hour zone unbypass events

are generated when the last assigned partition is disarmed.

OFF: When a non 24-hour zone is bypassed in [*][1], the system logs

and communicates the bypass status of the zone only after the parti-

tion is armed. This option is applied regardless of how zones are

bypassed in [*][1], recall bypass group, clear all bypasses, bypass

Section 5: Programming

open zones, bypass recall as well as other methods such as bypassing

via ITv2 or DLS.

Global Zones: 24-hour zone bypasses are logged and communicated

in real time. Non 24-hour zone bypass events are logged and commu-

nicated when armed. Non 24-hour zone unbypass events are logged

and communicated when the last partition is disarmed.

3 – Not Used

4 – Not Used

5 – Keypad Buzzer Alarm

ON: The keypad buzzer activates with all bell activity for the

selected partition.

OFF: The keypad buzzer only activates with alarms programmed to

do so.

6 – Not Used

7 – Exit Delay Restart

ON: Opening a delay zone door after it has already been opened and

closed during an exit delay restarts the exit delay timer. Further open-

ings and closings do not restart the timer.

OFF: Delay zone openings and closings do not restart the exit delay.

8 – AC Fail Trouble Beeps

ON: System keypads beep when an AC trouble event occurs.

OFF: System keypads are silent during AC troubles.

[019] System Option 7

1 –Not Used

2 – Latching Troubles

ON: Troubles remain on the system until viewed via [*][2], even if

they are restored. The trouble condition is cleared when the [#] key is

pressed from the [*][2] menu. The Trouble LED turns off unless

other troubles are present. The trouble is not cleared if the [*][2]

menu times out before the [#] key is pressed.

OFF: Troubles are cleared once restored.

3 – Not Used

4 – Not Used

5 – Audible Bus Fault

ON: Corbus fault conditions activate the siren.

OFF: The siren does not activate when Corbus faults occur.

6 – Duress Codes

ON: The duress code attribute can be enabled/disabled from the

[*][5] menu.

OFF: The duress code attribute is not accessible from the [*][5] menu.

7 – Temperature in Celsius

ON: Temperature is displayed in Celsius on LCD keypads.

OFF: Temperature is displayed in Fahrenheit on LCD keypads.

[020] System Option 8

3 – [*][8] Access While Armed

ON: This option ensures [*][8] installer programming is accessible

from a keypad on a disarmed partition while other partitions on the

system are still armed.

NOTE: For UL listed installations, this option must be disabled.

OFF: [*][8] installer programming is not available when any parti-

tion on the system is armed. All partitions must be disarmed and the

siren must be off before [*][8] is accessible.

[021] System Option 9

1 – Not Used

2 – Not Used

3– Auto-Arming Bypass

ON: All zones open at the end of the auto-arming exit delay are auto-

matically force armed.

OFF: Only zones with the Force Arm attribute enabled are automati-

cally force armed.

Force arming not used for UL/ULC listed installations (requires man-

ual bypass).

4 – Not Used

5 – Not Used

6 – Not Used

7 – Not Used

8 – Audible Exit Delay for Stay Arming

ON: When the system is armed in Stay mode the exit delay is

sounded by 1 beep every 3 seconds.

OFF: When the system is armed in Stay mode the exit delay is silent.

[022] System Option 10

1 – [F] Key Option

ON: When the [F] key is pressed, acknowledge beeps are only emit-

ted from the keypad. The siren does not sound.

OFF: [F] key acknowledgment beeps are emitted from the keypad

and the siren.

2 – Not Used

3 – Not Used

4 – Transmission Counter in Hours

ON: The alarm system sends a test transmission after the pro-

grammed number of hours in the test transmission cycle (Section

[377], Option 003).

OFF: The alarm system sends a test transmission after the pro-

grammed number of days.

5 – Away to Stay Toggle

ON: The alarm system cannot be switched from Away to Stay mode

by pressing the [Stay] function key.

OFF: The alarm system can be switched from Away to Stay mode by

pressing the [Stay] function key.

7 – Trouble Beeps are Silent

ON: When a trouble is detected on the system, trouble beeps are not

sounded at the keypad with the exception of Fire troubles.

OFF: When a trouble is detected on the system, trouble beeps are

sounded at the keypad.

NOTE: This option must be OFF for UL Residential Fire applica-

tions.

8 – Keyswitch Arms in Away Mode

ON: Keyswitch arming arms the alarm system in away mode.

OFF: Keyswitch arming arms the alarm system in away mode if an

entry/exit zone is violated during the exit delay.

[023] System Option 11

1 – Ready LED Flashes for Force Arm

ON: If a force arm capable zone is tripped, partition keypads flash

the ready LED in the disarmed state instead of illuminating it

Section 5: Programming

steadily. If a non-force arm capable zone is tripped, the ready LED

turns off.

OFF: If a force arm capable zone is tripped, the Ready LED is illumi-

nated steadily. If a non-force arm capable zone is tripped, the Ready

LED turns off.

2 – Not Used

4 – Access Code Required for [*][1]

ON: When using the [*][1] Bypass Zones command, an access code

must be input before zones are bypassed.

OFF: An access code is not required to bypass zones using [*][1].

5 – Access Code Required for [*][2]

ON: When using the [*][2] View Troubles command, an access code

must be input before system troubles can be viewed.

OFF: An access code is not required to view troubles using [*][2].

6 – Access Code Required for [*][3]

ON: When using the [*][3] View Alarms in Memory command, an

access code must be input before the alarm memory can be viewed.

OFF: An access code is not required to view alarms in memory using

[*][3].

7 – Access Code Required for [*][4]

ON: When using the [*][4] Chimes command, an access code must

be input before chimes can be toggled on and off.

OFF: An access code is not required to toggle chimes using [*][4].

8 – [*][6] Accessibility

ON: All user codes provide access to the [*][6] menu.

OFF: Only the master code provides access to the [*][6] menu.

[024] System Option 12

1 – 50Hz AC/60Hz AC

ON: Incoming AC power cycles at 50Hz.

OFF: Incoming AC power cycles at 60Hz.

NOTE: For UL/ULC listed systems, use only 60Hz setting.

2 – Crystal Timebase

ON: In situations where AC power input is unstable, the alarm con-

troller’s internal crystal is used as the time base.

OFF: The 50 or 60 Hz AC power input is used as the time base.

3 – AC/DC Inhibits Arming

ON: The system cannot be armed when an AC or DC trouble is pres-

ent. This includes keypad, keyswitch, automatic, and DLS arming.

An error tone is generated if the user attempts to arm the system

during an AC/DC trouble.

NOTE: Displaying AC troubles ([016] option 2) is strongly recom-

mended if this option is enabled.

OFF: The system can be armed, regardless of the presence of an AC

or DC trouble and does not check the system battery upon arming.

4 – Tampers Inhibit Arming

ON: Tampers must be restored through Installer Programming before

the system can be armed (including no-activity and keyswitch arm-

ing).

When this option is enabled, manual zone bypassing does not bypass

the tamper or fault states (DEOL). This feature also applies to zone

faults.

OFF: Tamper troubles do not latch and do not prevent arming.

5 – Real-Time Clock

ON: The alarm system sends a real-time clock request to the alternate

communicator at 4:05pm or when system time is lost. The system

uses the acquired time as system time.

OFF: The alarm system does not send a real-time clock request to the

alternate communicator. Local time setting is used as the system

time.

6 – Not Used

7 – Not Used

8 – DLS Disconnect

ON: All events except Periodic Test Transmission, Periodic Test with

Trouble, and System Test are considered priority events. If DLS is

active when an event occurs, the alarm system immediately termi-

nates the connection in order to communicate the new events.

OFF: Only the following alarm type events terminate a DLS session :

• Zone alarms

• FMP key alarms

• Duress alarms

• Zone expander supervisory alarms

• 2-wire smoke alarms

[025] System Option 13

1 – European Dial

ON: Pulse dialing make/break ratio is 33/67.

OFF: Pulse dialing make/break ratio is 40/60.

2 – Force Dial

ON: The system dials the central station phone number even if no

dial tone is present. The process is as follows:

1. Dial programmed phone number.

2. If no dial tone detected, terminate call.

3. Search for dial tone for 5 seconds.

4. If no dial tone detected, hang up for 20 seconds.

5. Search for dial tone for 5 seconds.

6. If no dial tone detected, dial anyway.

OFF: No attempt is made to contact the central station if dial tone is

not present.

NOTE: Force Dial must be enabled for UL installations.

3 – Not Used

4 – Not Used

5 – I.D. Tone

ON: After the telephone number is dialed, the alarm system emits a

tone (as specified by I.D. Tone Frequency option) for 500ms every

two seconds to indicate that a digital equipment call is in progress.

OFF: I.D. tone is disabled.

6 – Tone Generated-2100Hz

ON: 2100 Hz I.D. tone.

OFF: 1300 Hz I.D. tone.

7 – 1 Hour DLS Window

ON: When DLS access is enabled ([*][6] option 5 ON), Installer Pro-

gramming is accessible through DLS or the [*][8] menu only once

during a 1-hour window.

OFF: When DLS access is enabled, Installer Programming is accessi-

ble through DLS or the [*][8] menu an unlimited number of times

during a 6-hour window.

8 – FTC Audible Bell

ON: If a Failure to Communicate trouble is generated while the sys-

tem is armed, the siren activates for the length of bell time-out or

until the system is disarmed.

Section 5: Programming

OFF: If a Failure to Communicate trouble is generated while the

alarm system is armed, the siren does not activate but the keypad

buzzer emits trouble beeps until a key is pressed.

[040] User Authentication

This feature enables the installer or master user to select one of two

user authentication methods:

01 – User Code or Proximity Tag

The user can access the system by entering a valid code or by pre-

senting a proximity tag.

02 – User Code and Proximity Tag

The user must enter a valid code and present a proximity tag when-

ever the system prompts for an access code. A proximity tag is not

required to enter [*][8] Installer Programming.

[041] Access Code Digits

00 – 4-Digit Access Codes

User access codes are 4 digits long.

01 – 6-Digit Access Codes

User access codes are 6 digits long.

[042] Verified Events

Burglary Verified Counter

This option programs the number of zone activations required to ver-

ify an alarm. Valid entries are 000 to 255.

NOTE: Not for UL/ULC listed installations.

Burglary Verification Selection

Use this section to select one of the following burglary verification

timer modes:

5.3.8 Partition Setup

[151]-[158] Partition Auto-Arm/Disarm

Enter section 151 to 158 for partition 1 to 8 auto-arm/disarm configu-

ration.

[001] – Partition Auto-Arming Times

Use this section to program the time of day a partition is automati-

cally armed. A different auto-arming time can be programmed for

each day of the week from Sunday to Saturday. Time is in 24-hour

format (HH:MM) and valid entries are from 00:00 to 23:59.

Conditions that cancel auto-arming if enabled:

• Open zones (depending on the settings of the zone)

• AC/DC troubles

• System troubles

• Any valid disarming procedure - proximity tag, access code,

disarm key, etc.

[002] – Partition Auto-Disarm Times

Use this section to program the time of day a partition is disarmed. A

different auto-disarming time can be programmed for each day of the

week from Sunday to Saturday. Time is in 24-hour format (HH:MM)

and valid entries are from 00:00 to 23:59.

NOTE: If entry delay is active at auto-disarm time, the system does

not disarm. A valid disarming procedure is required by the user who

initiated the entry delay.

[003] – Partition Auto-Disarming Holiday Schedules

Use this section to select a holiday schedule group.

See “[711]-[714] Holiday Schedules” on page 52 for more informa-

tion.

[004] – Partition Auto-Arming Pre-Alert Timer

Use this section to program the duration of the auto-arm pre-alert.

The system arms when the pre-alert timer expires. Valid entries are

from 001 - 255 minutes.

If a valid access code is keyed in, this timer is postponed for the

length of time programmed in Partition Auto-Arm Postpone timer

(see below). The pre-alert timer can be postponed multiple times.

Keyswitches and proximity tags can be used to cancel auto-arming.

[005] – Partition Auto-Arm Postpone Timer

Use this section to program the length of time the auto-arm pre-alert

timer is postponed for. Valid entries are between 001 and 255 min-

utes. 000 cancels the postpone timer.

When the postpone timer expires, the Auto-arm pre-alert timer

restarts (unless the partition is armed). If left uninterrupted the parti-

tion arms at the end of the pre-alert.

If a code is entered during the pre-alert, auto-arm cancel/postpone is

logged and communicated and the postpone timer starts. When the

postpone timer expires, pre-alert is sounded again and the cycle

repeats. The Auto-arm may be postponed multiple times.

Conditions that cancel auto-arming:

• Open zones cancel arming / Auto Arm Force Arms Open

Zones

• AC/DC Inhibit Arming

• Any valid disarming procedure – proximity tag, access code,

disarm key

[006] – Partition No Activity Arming Timer

Use this section to program the duration of the No Activity timer. If

this timer expires and no zones have been activated, the partition

arms in Away mode (exit delay will not sound). When the timer

expires, keypad buzzers activate for the time programmed in No

Activity Arming Pre-Alert (see below).

The timer restarts when a delay type zone is restored. The timer does

not restart when the system is disarmed. The timer stops if an un-

bypassed zone is tripped, tampered or restored or with any keypad

activity.

Separate No Activity Arming timers are provided for each partition.

Valid entries are from 000 – 255 minutes. 000 disables this feature.

[007] – Partition No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer

Use this section to program the duration of the No Activity Arming

pre-alert that sounds when the No-Activity timer for the partition

expires. If any key is pressed or zone is activated or restored, the

Auto-Arm pre-alert is aborted.

Valid entries are 000 - 255 minutes. 000 disables this feature.

[200] Partition Mask

A partition is a limited area of the premises which operates inde-

pendently from the other areas. Partitions are added or removed from

the system by applying or removing a partition mask.

[001] – Partition 1 to 8 Enable Mask

Select options 01-08 to enable or disable partitions.

Partition 1 is always enabled. Partitions 2 to 8 are selectable.

Mode Description

001 Police Code The burglary verification timer oper-

ates in minutes.

002 Cross Zoning The burglary verification timer oper-

ates in seconds. The first alarm in the

sequence does not log or communi-

cate the alarm or activate the bell.

Section 5: Programming

The number of available partitions depends on the model, as shown

below:

[201]-[208] Partition Zone Assignment

Zones can be assigned to any partition. Global zones are zones

assigned to more than one partition. A global zone is only armed

when all assigned partitions are armed. The zone is disarmed when

any of the assigned partitions is disarmed. By default, zones 1

through 8 are assigned to partition 1.

To assign zones to partitions, first select a partition [201]-[208], then

select a zone group [001]-[016] and then a zone (1-8):

All zones assigned to a partition are supervised and operate accord-

ing to the zone type programmed. If a zone is not assigned to a parti-

tion, it is not supervised and all activity on the zone is ignored by the

system.

[300] Panel/Receiver Communication Paths

This section is used to select the path of communications between the

alarm system and the central station. Paths can be established

through either the alarm system’s on-board Public Switched Tele-

phone Network (PSTN) connection or through the alternate commu-

nicator (cellular or Ethernet) if equipped.

Paths to four receivers can be programmed using sections 001 - 004.

The communications path for each receiver is defined by selecting

one of the following six options:

[01] Phone Line

Events are communicated through the alarm system phone line pro-

grammed in section [301]. If Phone Line is selected for receiver 1,

the phone number programmed in section [301] option [001] is used.

If Phone Line is selected for receiver 2, the phone number pro-

grammed in section [301] option [002] is used, etc.

[02] Alternate Communicator Auto Routing (dual-path)

Selecting this option enables the alternate communicator to deter-

mine which communications path to use (Ethernet primary/second-

ary, cellular primary/secondary). See the alternate communicator

manual for details.

[03] Alternate Communicator Receiver 1

Events are communicated through IP receiver 1.

[04] Alternate Communicator Receiver 2

Events are communicated through IP receiver 2.

[05] Alternate Communicator Receiver 3

Events are communicated through cellular receiver 1.

[06] Alternate Communicator Receiver 4

Events are communicated through cellular receiver 2.

To use PSTN as the communications path, program section [300]

options 001 through 004 as [01] PSTN 1.

To use the alternate communicator to establish a communications

path, program two of the receivers (section [300] options 001, 002,

003 or 004) as [03] and [04] for Ethernet, and two of the receivers as

[05] and [06] for cellular.

[301] Phone Number Programming

Section [301] is used to program up to 4 telephone numbers used to

communicate with the central station over PSTN.

[001] The phone number used to communicate with receiver 1

[002] The phone number used to communicate with receiver 2

[003] The phone number used to communicate with receiver 3

[004] The phone number used to communicate with receiver 4

All telephone numbers can be a maximum of 32 digits. Hexadecimal

digits may be included to perform the following functions:

• HEX B ([*] [2] [*]) to dial "*"

• HEX C ([*] [3] [*]) - to dial "#"

• HEX D ([*] [4] [*]) - for an additional dial tone search, as required

by PBX telephone systems.

• HEX E ([*] [5] [*]) - to insert a 2-second pause in the telephone

number. This causes a static delay of 2 seconds before any addi-

tional dial tone search in a phone number.

• HEX F ([*] [6] [*]) - represents the end of the Phone Number

(everything after F is ignored)

• Pressing [#] in these sections exits and saves the entire phone num-

ber.

The alarm system does not attempt to communicate using PSTN if no

phone number is programmed.

[304] Call Waiting Cancel String

Use this section to program a string that, when pressed, disables call

waiting on a phone line. Call waiting cancel is typically *70 in most

areas. Dialing this string before a phone number disables call waiting

for the duration of the call.

When this section is programmed and Call Waiting Cancel Options is

ON (see [382] Communicator Option 3 on page 49), the alarm sys-

tem dials this string before the phone number. This is only done on

the first dialing attempt for each phone number.

This is a 6-digit field. Fill unused digits with Hex F.

5.3.9 Reporting

[307] Zone Reporting

Zone alarms, tampers and faults are transmitted to the central station

using automatic contact ID or SIA formats. Reporting can be toggled

on or off by zone using toggle options 1-6 in subsections 001-128.

See Appendix A: Event Codes on page 98.

[308] Event Reporting

System events are transmitted to the central station using automatic

contact ID or SIA formats. Reporting can be disabled by toggle

options, programmable in the following sub-sections.

See Appendix A: Event Codes on page 98 for event code descrip-

tions.

Model Zones Partitions

HS2128 128 8

HS2064 64 8

HS2032 32 4

HS2016 16 2

Zone

Group Zones Zone

Group Zones

001 1-8 009 65-72

002 9-16 010 73-80

003 17-24 011 81-88

004 25-32 012 89-96

005 33-40 013 97-104

006 41-48 014 105-112

007 49-56 015 113-120

008 57-64 016 121-128

Section 5: Programming

[001] Miscellaneous Alarm 1

The reporting codes in this section are sent to the Alarm & Restore

call direction group.

1 – Duress Alarm

Sent when a duress code is used to perform any function on the sys-

tem.

2 – Opening After Alarm

Sent during disarming if an alarm occurred during the previous

armed period.

3 – Recent Closing Alarm

Sent if an alarm occurs within 2 minutes of the exit time expiration

(for the first alarm only). Zone alarm transmission delays do not

effect this reporting code.

4/5 – Zone Expander Supervisory Alarm/ Restore

Sent when the system loses communication with the following mod-

ules:

• Zone Expander Module

• Keypad with an on-board I/O configured as a zone

This reporting code is independent of the general system supervisory

code sent to the maintenance call direction group.

6 – Burglary Verified

When using Cross Zoning, this reporting code is sent when two

crossed zones go into alarm during the cross zone timer.

When using Police Code, this reporting code is sent when any two

zones go into alarm. In both cases, only one reporting code is sent

during each armed to armed period. Arming the system resets the

zone alarm count for police code.

7 – Burglary Not Verified

When using Cross Zoning, this reporting code is sent if the cross

zone timer is initiated by the first cross zone alarm, but is not verified

by a second alarm before the timer expires.

8 – Alarm Cancel

Sent when a valid access code is entered during the communications

cancel window. The central station acknowledges cancellation by

providing a keypad ringback.

NOTE:

[011] Priority Alarms 1

The reporting codes in this section are sent to the Alarm & Restore

call direction group and apply to all system keypads.

1/2 – Keypad Fire Alarm-[F] Key Alarm/Restore

Sent when [F] Key alarms/restores occur.

3/4 – Keypad Medical Alarm-[M] Key Alarm/Restore

Sent when [M] Key alarms/restores occur. The keypad beeps 10

times when the medical alarm is successfully communicated to the

alarm monitoring station.

5/6 – Keypad Panic Alarm-[P] Key Alarm/Restore

Sent when [P] Key alarms/restores occur.

7/8 – Auxiliary Input Alarm/ Restore

Sent when an alarm condition occurs/ is restored on PGM 2 (if con-

figured as an input).

[021] Fire Alarms 1

3/4 – PGM 2 2-Wire Alarm/Restore

When PGM 2 is programmed as a 2-wire smoke alarm, this reporting

code is sent when an alarm condition is detected and when it is

restored.

[101] Tamper Events

3/4 – Module Tamper/Restore

This reporting code is transmitted when a system module enters a

tamper alarm state and uses the System Tamper Alarm and Tamper

Restore call direction.

5 – Keypad Lockout

Sent when a number of invalid access codes have been entered at a

system keypad

This reporting code is sent to the system Tamper Alarm & Tamper

Restore call direction group.

7 – Remote Lockout

Sent when a number of invalid access codes have been entered

through DLS or Integration. This reporting code is sent to the system

Tamper Alarm & Tamper Restore call direction group.

[201] Open/Close Events 1

1/2 – User Closing/Opening

This reporting code is transmitted when a user arms/disarms a parti-

tion and uses the Opening and Closing call direction.

5/6 – Special Closing/Opening

This reporting code is transmitted when a partition is closed/opened

using a keyswitch zone, downloading, quick arm ([*][0]), or Stay or

Away function keys without an access code. The Opening and Clos-

ing call direction group is used for this reporting code.

[202] Open/Close Events 2

1 – Automatic Closing

This reporting code is transmitted when a partition is automatically

armed or schedule armed and uses the Opening call direction group.

3 – Auto Arm Cancellation/Postpone

This reporting code is transmitted when the automatic arm sequence

is canceled during a pre-alert and uses the Opening and Closing call

direction group.

[211] Miscellaneous Open/Close Events

1/2 – Late to Close/Open

This reporting code is transmitted when a partition is not disarmed

before the automatic disarm time, when the late to open option,

([*][6], option 9) is enabled. The Opening and Closing call direction

group is used for this reporting code.

5 – Exit Fault

This reporting code is transmitted when an exit error occurs and entry

delay expires before the system is disarmed. The Alarms and

Restores call direction group is used for this reporting code.

If the delay zone that caused the exit error has cross zoning enabled,

the exit fault and zone alarm transmits if a second zone is not tripped.

The local alarm sequence follows cross zoning rules. The exit error is

transmitted with the zone alarm that caused the fault, even if that

zone has transmission delay enabled.

[221] Bypass Events

1/2 – Automatic Zone Bypass/Unbypass

This reporting code is transmitted when a zone is automatically

bypassed/unbypassed and uses the Opening and Closing call direc-

tion group.

03 – Partial Closing

This reporting code is transmitted if zones are manually bypassed at

the time of arming or force armed by automatic arming. The Opening

and Closing call direction group is used for this reporting code.

Automatic bypasses caused by stay arming do not cause transmission

of this code.

Section 5: Programming

[301] Panel Events 1

1/2 – Panel AC Fail Trouble/Restore

This reporting code is transmitted when the alarm system AC supply

fails or has been restored. A programmable delay applies to both the

trouble and the restore. This reporting code is sent to the System

Maintenance call direction group.

3/4 – Panel Low Battery Trouble/Restore

These reporting codes are transmitted when the panel battery voltage

falls below 11.5VD or is restored. These reporting codes are sent to

the System Maintenance call direction group.

5/6 – Panel Battery Absent Trouble/Restore

These reporting codes are transmitted when the panel battery voltage

falls below 11.5VD or is restored. These reporting codes are sent to

the System Maintenance call direction group and are transmitted

when the panel battery is detected as absent.

[302] Panel Events 2

1/2 – Bell Circuit Trouble/Restore

This reporting code is transmitted when a bell trouble condition

occurs or is restored on the system.This reporting code is sent to the

System Maintenance call direction group.

3/4 – Telephone Line Trouble and Restore

This reporting code is transmitted when an alarm controller TLM

trouble occurs or is restored. The TLM trouble is communicated over

an unaffected communication path if available.

This reporting code is sent to the System Maintenance call direction

group.

5/6 – Auxiliary Power Supply Trouble/Restore

This reporting code is transmitted when an auxiliary voltage supply

trouble occurs or is restored. This reporting code is sent to the Sys-

tem Maintenance call direction group.

NOTE: When the electronic fuse built in to the auxiliary power sup-

ply is tripped due to a short or high current draw, the alarm system

must be powered down then back up to reset the fuse.

[305] Panel Events 5

3/4 – PGM 2 2-Wire Trouble/Restore

This reporting code is transmitted when a trouble condition on PGM

2, configured as 2-wire smoke, occurs or is restored. This reporting

code is sent to the System Maintenance call direction group.

[311] Maintenance Events 1

1/2 – RF Jam Trouble/Restore

Sent when RF jam troubles occur/are restored. The following events

cause RF jam troubles:

• Wireless repeater jamming

•RF jam

3/4 – Fire Trouble/Restore

Sent when a low sensitivity, tamper or internal fault condition/restore

is detected on a wireless smoke detector.

5 – Cold Start

Sent when power is restored to the alarm system after total power

failure. The code is sent after 2 minutes to allow the alarm controller

to stabilize.

6 – Delinquency

When the Delinquency option is off (page 45), this code is transmit-

ted if the alarm system has not been armed for the number of days

programmed in the Delinquency Transmission Delay (page 48).

When the Delinquency option is on, this code is transmitted when no

zone activity has been detected on the system for the number of hours

programmed in Delinquency Transmission Delay.

[312] Maintenance Events 2

1/2 – Installer Lead In/ Lead Out

The Installer Lead In and Lead Out reporting codes are sent when the

alarm system enters and exits Installer Programming respectively.

When Installer Programming is automatically exited after PC-Link is

activated, the Installer Lead Out event is not communicated until

after the DLS session is complete.

3/4 – DLS Lead In/Lead Out

The DLS Lead In reporting code is sent:

• after DLS communication has been successfully established, but

before the alarm system calls back the downloading computer.

This code is only transmitted when call back is enabled

• on user-initiated call-up.

The DLS Lead Out reporting code is sent when a DLS session is suc-

cessfully ended.

NOTE: If DLS is terminated by an alarm, the DLS Lead Out report-

ing code is not transmitted.

5/6 – SA Lead In/Lead Out

The SA Lead In reporting code is sent:

• after SA communication has been successfully established, but

before the alarm system calls back the downloading computer.

This code is only transmitted when call back is enabled.

• on user-initiated call-up.

The SA Lead Out reporting code is sent when an SA session is suc-

cessfully ended. The SA Lead Out reporting code is still sent if the

session is terminated by an alarm.

7 Event Buffer 75% Full

Sent when the event buffer reaches a threshold of 75% without being

uploaded.

[313] Maintenance Events 3

1/2 – Firmware Update Begin/was Successful

Sent when a remote firmware update is initiated/ is successfully com-

pleted.

3 – Firmware Update Fail

Sent after an unsuccessful remote firmware update.

[314] Maintenance Events 4

1/2 – Gas Trouble/Restore

3/4 – Heat Trouble/Restore

5/6 – Freeze Trouble/Restore

7/8 – Probe Disconnected Trouble/Restore

[321] Receiver Events

2/4/6/8 – Receiver 1 - 4 FTC Restore

Sent when the panel detects an FTC trouble.

[331] Module Events 1

1/2 – Module AC Trouble/Restore

This reporting code is transmitted when a module’s AC supply fails

or has been restored. A programmable delay applies to both the trou-

ble and the restore. This reporting code is sent to the System Mainte-

nance call direction group.

Section 5: Programming

3/4 – Module Battery Trouble/Restore

These reporting codes are transmitted when a module’s battery volt-

age falls below 11.5VDC or is restored. These reporting codes are

sent to the System Maintenance call direction group.

5/6 – Module Battery Absent/Restore

These reporting codes are transmitted when a module’s battery is

detected as absent or restored. These reporting codes are sent to the

System Maintenance call direction group.

[332] Module Events 2

1/2 – Module Low Voltage Trouble/Restore

Sent when module voltage drops below acceptable levels or is

restored.

3/4 – Module Supervisory Trouble/Restore

Sent when communication with a module is lost or restored.

5/6 – Module Aux Trouble/Restore

Sent when a high current output module or power supply module

experiences an auxiliary voltage supply trouble.

[335] Module Events 5

1/2 – Output 1 Fault/Restore

This reporting code is sent when the first output on the high-current

output expander module goes into fault (open or short) or is restored.

Only the first output on the high-current expander module is super-

vised.

[351] Alternate Communicator 1

1/2 – Alt. Comm Communications Fault/Restore

Sent when the system loses or restores communications with the

alternate communicator.

3/4 – Not used

5/6 – Not used

7/8 – Alt. Comm Radio/SIM Failure/Restore

Sent when the alternate communicator experiences trouble or restore

of the radio/SIM.

[352] Alternate Communicator 2

1/2 – 1/2 – Alt. Comm Network Fault/Restore

Sent when the alternate communicator loses or restores communica-

tion with the network.

3/4 – Alt. Comm Low Signal Trouble/Restore

Sent when the alternate communicator experiences a network low

signal trouble or restore.

5/6 – Alt. Comm Ethernet Trouble /Restore

Sent when the alternate communicator detects a network absent con-

dition or DHCP failure or restore.

7/8 – Alt. Comm Lockout Trouble/Restore

Sent when the alternate communicator detects a SIM lock trouble or

network lock trouble or when either condition is restored.

[354] Alternate Communicator 4

Receiver 1 to 4 Trouble and Restore

Sent when the alternate communicator detects a trouble or restore

condition on receiver 1-4.

1/2 – Receiver 1 Trouble/Restore

3/4 – Receiver 2 Trouble/Restore

5/6 – Receiver 3 Trouble/Restore

7/8 – Receiver 4 Trouble/Restore

[355] Alternate Communicator 5

Receiver 1 to 4 Supervision Failure and Restore

Sent when the alternate communicator detects a supervision trouble

for the Ethernet receiver (1, 2) or the GPRS receiver (3, 4).

1/2 – Receiver 1 Supervision Failure/Restore

3/4 – Receiver 2 Supervision Failure/Restore

5/6 – Receiver 3 Supervision Failure/Restore

7/8 – Receiver 4 Supervision Failure/Restore

[361] Wireless Device Events

1/2 – Wireless Device AC Failure/Restore

These options are used to enable wireless device AC failure/restore

reporting codes. These reporting codes are sent when a wireless

device experiences an AC failure/restore.

3/4 – Wireless Device Low Battery Trouble/Restore

These options are used to enable wireless device low battery trouble/

restore reporting codes. These codes are sent when a wireless device

experiences a low battery trouble/restore.

5/6 – Wireless Device Fault/Restore

These options are used to enable wireless device fault/restore report-

ing codes. This reporting code is sent when a wireless device experi-

ences a supervisory fault.

[401] System Test Events

1/2 – Walk Test Start/End

Sent when installer walk test is initiated and terminated.

These reporting codes are in addition to the alarm reporting codes for

the zones that are tripped during the walk test period, if configured in

section [382] Communicator Option 3 on page 49.

3 – Periodic Test Transmission

Sent when the test transmission programmed in section [401] Sys-

tem Test Events on page 46 occurs.

4 – Periodic Test Transmission with Trouble

Sent when any of the following trouble conditions are present during

a periodic test transmission:

• Fire Zone Trouble

• Battery Trouble

• Fire Zone Alarm (2-Wire Smoke)

• Aux Trouble

• Fire Trouble

• Bell Trouble

• Fire Tamper/Low Sensitivity (WLS)

• Module Supervisory

• Fire Zones Bypassed

• Ground Fault

• Fire Supervisory (Wireless)

• TLM Trouble

• AC Trouble

• FTC Trouble

This reporting code is sent in place of the standard Periodic Test

Transmission code.

5 – System Test

Sent when a manual system test is performed ([*][6][Master

Code][04]).

5.3.10 System Communications

The programming options in this section are used to configure com-

munications between the alarm system and the central station.

Section 5: Programming

[309] System Call Direction

Use this programming option to select the central station receivers

that system events are communicated to. A system event can be sent

to multiple receivers.

[001] Maintenance Events/Restores (all troubles

except tampers)

These options control which receiver paths are enabled for mainte-

nance events. To assign a maintenance event to a receiver, select

from the following list:

[01] Receiver 1

[02] Receiver 2

[03] Receiver 3

[04] Receiver 4

[002] Test Transmissions

These options control which receiver paths are enabled for test trans-

mission events. To assign a test transmission event to a receiver,

select from the following list:

[01] Receiver 1

[02] Receiver 2

[03] Receiver 3

[04] Receiver 4

[310] Account Codes

These programming sections are used to set the system and partition

account codes.

[000] System Account Code

The system account code is used to identify the alarm system when

communicating system events to the central station. The system

account code can be either 4 or 6 digits long. Program a 6-digit code

only when using the SIA reporting format. SIA uses this account

code for all partitions and system events. All other reporting formats

use a 4-digit system account code to report system maintenance (e.g.,

low battery, zone fault) and test transmission events. To program a 4-

digit code, add FF to the last two digits.

[001]-[008] Partition Account Codes

Use these sections to program account codes for each partition.

When using formats other than SIA, these account codes identify the

alarm system to the central station when communicating partition-

specific events.

NOTE: The system will not communicate if the account code is not

programmed. When this condition occurs, Account Code Not Pro-

grammed is briefly displayed on the keypad when exiting Installer

Programming mode.

NOTE: If no phone numbers are programmed, the error message

does not occur.

[311]-[318] Partition Call Directions

Use this programming option to select the central station receivers

that partition events are communicated to. Call directions can be pro-

grammed for each partition. Each event can be sent to one of four

receivers.

[001] Alarm/ Restore

These options control which receiver paths are enabled for Partition

1-8 Alarm and Restore event reporting codes.

To assign an event to a receiver, select one of the following options:

[01] Receiver 1

[02] Receiver 2

[03] Receiver 3

[04] Receiver 4

[002] Tampers (Including System Tampers)/ Restore

These options control which receiver paths are enabled for Partition

1-8 Tamper and Restore event reporting codes.

To assign an event to a receiver, select one of the following options:

[01] Receiver 1

[02] Receiver 2

[03] Receiver 3

[04] Receiver 4

[003] Openings/ Closing

These options control which receiver paths are enabled for Partition

1-8 Opening and Closing event reporting codes. To assign an event to

a receiver, select one of the following options:

[01] Receiver 1

[02] Receiver 2

[03] Receiver 3

[04] Receiver 4

[350] Communicator Formats

Use this programming option to assign a communicator format to

each of the four receivers programmed in section [301]. The avail-

able communicator formats are as follows:

To assign a communications format, select a receiver (option [001]-

[004]) then enter the 2-digit code corresponding to the chosen for-

mat. For detailed descriptions of each format, see page 98.

[377] Communication Variables

[001] – Swinger Shutdown

Alarms/Restores

This value defines the number of communication attempts made for

alarm/restore events, per zone, before the zone goes into swinger

shutdown. Valid entries are 000 to 014. For CP-01, entries are from

001-006.

Once the programmed number of alarm/restore events have been

communicated, no further alarm/restore events for the zone are com-

municated until swinger shutdown is reset. The last restore event is

not communicated until swinger is cleared. For example, if the

swinger shutdown limit for zone alarms is set to [003], the cycle is as

follows: alarm/restore, alarm/restore, alarm...8 hours or arm/dis-

arm...restore.

The bell output is not activated for alarms on zones that have

exceeded the swinger shutdown counter limit. Swinger shutdown on

global zones log once to the system area.

NOTE: Swinger shutdown resets on all partitions when any partition

on the system is armed or disarmed, or every day at midnight. For

CP-01, swinger shutdown is restored after 8 hours of inactivity.

Once reset, the alarm system communicates normally.

NOTE: The event buffer can follow swinger shutdown if enabled.

Tampers / R e stores

This value defines the number of times the same system tamper event

occurs before going into swinger shutdown. Valid entries are 000 to

014.

Maintenance Troubles/Restores

This value defines the number of times the same system Maintenance

(trouble) type event occurs before going into swinger shutdown. Fire

troubles follow the Maintenance Swinger Shutdown variable.

03 DTMF Contact ID

04 SIA FSK

Section 5: Programming

[002] – Communication Delays

Transmission Delay (seconds)

This value defines the delay before an alarm is transmitted.

The delay is for zones which have the Transmission Delay attribute

enabled. Valid entries are from 000 to 255 seconds (0-45 seconds for

CP-01). Each partition shares the same active timer. If the delay is

already active due to an alarm on a different partition, any new activ-

ity on another partition does not restart the communications delay

timer.

Burglary verified events are postponed until after the transmission

delay expires. When a valid disarming procedure is used while the

transmission delay is active, a communications canceled message is

briefly displayed on the keypad when the delay is canceled.

For UL/ULC listed installations, the entry delay plus communication

delay cannot exceed 45 seconds.

AC Failure Communication Delay (minutes or hours)

This value determines the delay before an AC failure or AC restore is

reported. The AC failure or restore is still displayed immediately.

Valid entries are from 000 to 255 minutes/hours (max. 180 minutes

for UL commercial installations). Selection of minutes or hours for

the delay is set in section [382] Communicator Option 3 on page 49.

NOTE: If AC Failure Communications Delay is programmed as

000, the AC Failure Trouble reporting code is sent immediately.

NOTE: For ULC commercial fire monitoring, the setting shall be

180 minutes.

TLM Trouble Delay

Use this section to program the number of valid checks (3 second

intervals) required before a telephone line trouble is generated. Valid

entries are 000-255 for trouble annunciation and transmission delays

of 3 to 765 Seconds (12.75 Minutes).

Wireless Zone Low Battery Transmission Delay (in days)

When a zone reports a low battery condition, the trouble is indicated

immediately on the keypad, but the transmission to the monitoring

station is delayed by the number of days programmed in this section.

If the low battery condition is not corrected before the delay expires,

the low battery condition is transmitted. The Low Battery Restore

transmission is not delayed.

Delinquency Transmission Delay

The value in this section determines the period of time before a delin-

quency event is generated.

Delinquency delay is measured in days if using closing delinquency

or hours if using activity delinquency as programmed in section [311]

option 6. Valid entries are [001]-[255] or [000] to disable.

Communications Cancel Window

After the transmission Delay expires and a zone alarm is transmitted,

the communications cancel window begins.

If an access code is entered during this window, a reporting code is

communicated and logged. If the window expires without an access

code entry or a code is entered after the window, the communications

canceled event is not logged or communicated.

NOTE: The cancel window does not start after an [F][M][P] key

alarm.

[003] – Periodic Test Transmission Cycle

This value determines the period between test transmissions. Valid

entries are [000]-[255]. Whether this interval is in hours or days is

determined by section [022], option 4.

NOTE: For UL/ULC listed installations, the test interval is 24 hours.

[004] – Periodic Test Transmission Time of Day

Enter a 4-digit time using the 24-hour clock format (HH:MM).

Valid entries are from 00 to 23 for the hours (HH) and 00 to 59 for the

minutes (MM).

To disable the test transmission time of day, enter [9999] in this sec-

tion.

NOTE: This time should not be set for the same time as Day Light

Savings time.

[011] – Maximum Dialing Attempts

This section is used to program the number of dialing attempts made

to each telephone number when communicating. Valid entries are

001-005.

For UL/ULC listed installations, this value must be set to 005.

[012] – Delay Between PSTN Attempts

This programmable timer adds a delay before the next call is

attempted over PSTN. Valid entries are 000-255, with a default of 3

seconds (making a total of 8 seconds: 3-second delay + standard 5-

second dial tone search).

[013] – Delay Between Force Attempts

This programming option is used to set the length of time the alarm

system waits between the first dialing attempt and the force dial

attempt.

Valid Entries are 001-255 seconds. Default is 020.

[014] – Post Dial Wait for Handshake

This option is used to program the length of time the communicator

waits for a valid initial handshake from the receiver after dialing the

programmed telephone number. Valid entries are 001 to 255 seconds.

NOTE: Maximum 45 seconds for UL installations.

[015] – T-Link Wait for Ack

This option is used to program the length of time the communicator

waits for an acknowledge after transmitting via IP/GS. Valid entries

are 001 to 255. Default is 60 seconds.

[016] – IP/Cellular Fault Check Timer

This section is used to program the number of poll commands sent

without valid poll responses before the alarm system generates a

trouble condition. The checks occur at 3-second intervals.

Valid entries are 003-255 for trouble annunciation and transmission.

The trouble restore is not delayed.

[380] Communicator Option 1

1 – Communications Enabled/Disabled

ON: (Default) The system communicator is enabled and all events

with reporting codes are reported to the monitoring station. Refer to

the Telephone Number, Reporting Code and Call Direction program-

ming sections.

OFF: The system communicator is disabled and no events are

reported to the monitoring station.

NOTE: Disabling the communicator clears all FTC troubles.

2 – Restore On Bell Timeout

ON: Zone restore reporting codes are not transmitted until the zone

has been restored and the bell timeout has expired. If the zone is not

restored when the bell cut-off time expires, the restore is transmitted

when the zone physically restores or when the system is disarmed.

NOTE: 24-hour zones will not restore until the zone is physically

restored

OFF: Zone restore reporting codes are transmitted when the zone is

physically restored. If zones are still active when the system is dis-

armed, the restore codes are transmitted when the system is dis-

armed.

Section 5: Programming

3 – Pulse Dialing

ON: The alarm system dials telephone numbers using pulse (rotary)

dialing.

OFF: The alarm system dials telephone numbers using DTMF (dual

tone multi-frequency) touch-tone dialing.

4 – Pulse Dial after 5th Attempt

ON: If DTMF dialing is enabled, the alarm system dials telephone

numbers using DTMF dialing for the first 4 attempts. If unsuccessful,

the alarm system switches to pulse (rotary) dialing for the remaining

attempts.

OFF: If DTMF dialing is enabled, the alarm system dials telephone

numbers using DTMF dialing for all dialing attempts.

5 – Parallel Communications

ON: Parallel communications is enabled. The alarm system attempts

to communicate through all available receivers at the same time.

Once acknowledgment is provided by any of the receivers, the alarm

system communicates the next event. If more than one receiver is

configured for PSTN, the backup procedure described below is fol-

lowed.

OFF: Parallel communications is disabled. If receiver 1 fails, the

alarm system attempts to communicate with the next available

receiver (2-4) in sequence.

NOTE: See [384] Communicator Backup Options on page 50 for

communicator backup programming.

6 – Alternate Dial

ON: After each failed dialing attempt, the communicator switches to

the next backup receiver in the sequence:

• Receiver 2 backs up Receiver 1

• Receiver 3 backs up Receiver 2

• Receiver 4 backs up Receiver 3

This continues until communication is successful or the sequence has

been repeated 5 times (depending on the number of maximum dialing

attempts). If all 5 attempts fail, an FTC trouble for the primary phone

number is logged. All backup receivers automatically use the same

call directions and format as the primary receiver.

OFF: After 5 failed attempts to communicate with the primary

receiver, the communicator switches to the next backup receiver in

the sequence and makes up to 5 more attempts. This continues until

communication is successful or until all backup receivers fail, at

which point an FTC trouble for the primary number is logged.

7 – Reduced Dialing Attempts

ON: If a TLM trouble is present, the alarm system immediately

attempts to call the backup receiver. This option only applies to

PSTN. Backup communications must be enabled. See option 5, Par-

allel Communications.

A minimum of two receivers should be enabled for this feature to

operate as intended.

OFF: If a TLM trouble is present, the number of dialing attempts pro-

grammed shall be attempted before moving on to the backup

receiver.

8 – Activity Delinquency

ON: Inactivity on a partition for a programmed duration (section

[377] option 002, Delinquency Transmission Delay) transmits a

Delinquency code to the central station. This option is designed to

help monitor the elderly or disabled. The counter is reset if zone

activity is detected or if the system is armed. The Delinquency Trans-

mission Delay is in hours.

NOTE: Delinquency code is not transmitted while Away armed.

Activity on bypassed zones does not affect this timer.

OFF: The Delinquency reporting code is sent when the programmed

number of days for delinquency (section [377]) expires without the

partition being Armed. Once the code is sent, the timer is not started

again until the partition has been armed. Each day programmed in the

counter represents one day plus the time it takes for the partition to

reach midnight. To disable this feature, program 000 in section

[377]>[002] option 5.

[381] Communicator Option 2

1 – Keypad Ringback

ON: When the Opening After Alarm reporting code is successfully

transmitted to a programmed telephone number, the keypad emits a

series of 8 beeps to confirm to the occupant that the code was sent

and received. Ringback occurs for each successfully reported Open-

ing After Alarm code.

OFF: When the Opening After Alarm reporting code is successfully

transmitted to a programmed telephone number, the keypad does not

sound ringback.

2 – Bell Ringback

ON: When the Opening After Alarm reporting code is successfully

transmitted to a programmed telephone number, the siren emits a

series of 8 squawks to confirm to the occupant that the code was sent

and received. Ringback occurs for each successfully reported Open-

ing After Alarm code.

OFF: When the Opening After Alarm reporting code is successfully

transmitted to a programmed telephone number, the siren does not

sound ringback.

4 – Closing Confirmation Enabled/Disabled

ON: When a Closing reporting code is successfully transmitted to a

programmed telephone number, the keypad emits a series of 8 beeps

to confirm to the occupant that the Closing Code was sent and

received.

OFF: No keypad ringback is generated when a Closing reporting

code is successfully transmitted.

8 – Communications Priority Enabled/Disabled

ON: Events follow the priority level indicated in ULC-S559 stan-

dard.

Concurrent event communications are prioritized in the following

order (highest to lowest priority):

1. Fire Alarms

2. CO Alarm

3. Fire Supervisories

4. Fire Trouble

5. Monitoring (Medical, Panic or Security)

6. All others such as restorals for fire alarms, supervisories, trou-

bles and monitoring.

7. FTC'ed events

OFF: Events are communicated in the order they occur.

NOTE: Must be ON for ULC commercial fire monitoring listed

installations.

[382] Communicator Option 3

1 – Not Used

2 – Walk Test Communications

ON: Zone alarms that occur during Walk Test are communicated if

programmed to do so.

OFF: Zone alarms during Walk Test are not communicated. FMP key

alarms are still communicated.

4 – Call Waiting Cancel

ON: The call waiting cancel string (page 43) is used on the first

attempt to dial each phone number. It is not used on any further dial-

ing attempts.

OFF: The call waiting cancel string is not dialed.

Section 5: Programming

5 – Alternate Communicator Enable/Disable

ON: The system communicates using the alternate communicator.

All related programming options, reporting and supervision are

enabled when programmed via PC-Link2.

OFF: The alternate communicator and all associated programming

functionality are disabled. The auto time update feature is disabled.

NOTE: If alternate communicator troubles are present when the

communicator is disabled, the troubles are logged, communicated,

and cleared from [*][2]. When the communicator is re-enabled, the

trouble conditions are again logged, communicated and indicated in

[*][2].

6 – AC Failure Communication Delay in Hours/Minutes

ON: The AC failure communication delay (section [377]>[002]

option 2) is programmed in hours.

OFF: The AC failure communication delay is programmed in min-

utes.

8 – Not Used

[383] Communicator Option 4

1 – Phone Number Account Code

ON: The account code communicated to the central station follows

the phone number the event is programmed to communicate on (pro-

grammed in section [310] Account Codes on page 47):

• Receiver 1 all events will follow partition 1 account code

• Receiver 2 all events will follow partition 2 account code

• Receiver 3 all events will follow partition 3 account code

• Receiver 4 all events will follow partition 4 account code

OFF: Events follow the account code assigned to each partition when

communicating.

NOTE: This feature only works with CID

2 – 4 or 6-Digit System Account Code

ON: The programmable account code in section [310][000] is 6 dig-

its long (used for SIA format).

OFF: The programmable account code in section [310][000] is 4 dig-

its long.

5 – Communicate FTC Events

ON: The alarm system communicates FTC (failure to communicate)

events. The FTC Trouble/Restore reporting code transmission fol-

lows the call direction the events are assigned to.

OFF: FTC events are not communicated. FTC Trouble/Restore

reporting codes are communicated to the Maintenance call direction

group after the next successful communication.

6 – Not used

[384] Communicator Backup Options

2 – Receiver 2 Backup Option

ON: Receiver 2 backs up Receiver 1. Receiver 2 is only used if an

FTC event is detected on Receiver 1.

Receiver 2 uses the same format programmed for Receiver 1.

OFF: Receiver 2 is independent and will communicate if a number

and format are programmed.

3 – Receiver 3 Backup Option

ON: Receiver 3 backs up Receiver 2. Receiver 3 is only used if an

FTC event is detected on Receiver 2.

Receiver 3 uses the same format programmed for Receiver 2.

OFF: Receiver 3 is independent and will communicate if a number

and format are programmed.

4 – Receiver 4 Backup Option

ON: Receiver 4 backs up Receiver 3. Receiver 4 is only used if an

FTC event is detected on Receiver 3.

Receiver 4 uses the same format programmed for Receiver 3.

OFF: Receiver 4 is independent and will communicate if a number

and format are programmed.

5.3.11 DLS Programming

Downloading allows programming of the entire alarm system via a

computer. All functions and features, changes and status, such as

trouble conditions and open zones, can be viewed or programmed by

downloading.

The following downloading options are available:

• 6-hour window on start up: When the alarm system is powered

up, downloading access is available for 6 hours. This provides

the option of downloading without having to complete any key-

pad programming.

• Double call method: The installer initiates a downloading win-

dow by calling the alarm system, hanging up, then calling back

again.

• User enabled DLS window: The user initiates a downloading

window using [*][6][Master code][05]. This can be a 6-hour

window where the installer initiates and terminates download-

ing as many times as necessary, or it can be a 1-hour, 1 use win-

dow.

• User initiated call-up: the user can initiate a downloading ses-

sion using [*][6][Master Code][06].

• On-site downloading using PC-Link: The installer connects a

computer directly to the alarm system to perform on-site down-

• Auto event buffer upload: The Event buffer is automatically

uploaded to the DLS/SA computer when it reaches 75% full.

Refer to the DLS/SA programming sections described below for con-

figuration options.

[401] DLS/SA Options

1 – Double Call

ON: Calls for downloading or SA are answered if a successful double

call routine is detected. Have the downloading computer call the sys-

tem and let the telephone line ring once or twice. After 1 or 2 rings,

hang up. If called back within the duration of the double call timer

(section [405]), the alarm system answers on the first ring.

OFF: Incoming calls are not answered using the double call routine

unless the user enables the DLS window.

NOTE: This feature controls the DLS window for PSTN connec-

tions only.

2 – User Enables/Disables DLS

ON: The [*][6][Master Code][05] command enables a 6-hour win-

dow where, on power-up, downloading calls are answered if a suc-

cessful double call routine is detected.

OFF: The user cannot enable a downloading window.

3 – DLS CallBack

ON: When a downloading call is answered, both the computer and

the alarm system hang up. The alarm system then calls the download-

ing computer back using the downloading telephone number and

begins the DLS session.

NOTE: Disable this option if using more than one downloading

computer.

OFF: After successful validation, the downloading computer gains

immediate access to the alarm system.

Section 5: Programming

4 – User Call-Up

ON: A single call attempt can be made to the downloading computer

using [*][6][Master Code][06].

OFF: [*][6][Master Code][06] does not allow initiation of a down-

loading session.

6 – Panel Call-Up and Baud Rate

ON: When a DLS/SA session is initiated by the user, the initial

header is sent at 300 baud.

OFF: When a DLS/SA session is initiated by the user, the initial

header is sent at 110 baud. The alarm system will then switch to 300

baud in order to receive the response from the DLS computer.

7 – Alternate Communicator DLS

ON: When this feature is enabled, the alarm system responds to DLS

requests through the alternate communicator IP or cellular paths at

any time, regardless of whether the DLS window is active or not.

However, if a pre-defined number of consecutive incorrect DLS

access codes is detected (See “Remote Lockout DLS” on page 37)

while trying to establish a connection, alternate communicator DLS

access is locked out until the next hour roll-over.

OFF: When this feature is disabled, the alarm system only responds

to DLS requests through the alternate communicator IP or cellular

paths when the DLS window is active.

The DLS/SA window is active following a power up or if enabled

using [*][6][maser code][05] (System Service/DLS).

NOTE: This option controls DLS over alternate communicator only.

[402] PSTN DLS Phone Number

Programming

This section is used to program the telephone number for DLS down-

loading over PSTN. This phone number is used for User Call Up,

Periodic DLS and DLS Call back. If no phone number is pro-

grammed, the system attempts to use the alternate communicator IP

path (if configured).

The maximum number length is 32 digits.

[403] DLS Access Code

This 6-digit hexadecimal code allows the alarm system to confirm

the identity of the downloading computer.

If the code does not match the computer, the alarm system does not

allow DLS access.

Once a DLS connection is established, the operator is allowed three

attempts to enter the correct access code. If these attempts are unsuc-

cessful, the alarm system disconnects and a new attempt must be

made.

If cellular or IP paths are used for the DLS connection, a pre-pro-

grammed number of unsuccessful attempts causes a 1-hour DLS

lockout. Number of attempts is programmed in section [012].

[404] DLS/SA Panel ID

This 10-digit hexadecimal code identifies the alarm system to the

downloading computer.

[405] PSTN Double Call Timer

Use this section to program the amount of time that can elapse

between the first and second call when using Double Call download-

ing. Valid entries are 001 to 255 (seconds).

[406] PSTN Number of Rings to Answer On

The value in this section determines how many rings are required in

order to establish a DLS connection. Default value is 000 rings. Valid

entries are [000]-[020].

NOTE: If Double-Call option and Number of Rings to Answer are

enabled, either one will work depending on how the installer calls the

alarm system.

[407] SA Access Code

This 6-digit hexadecimal code allows the alarm system to confirm

the identity of the downloading computer.

If the code does not match the computer, the alarm system does not

allow uploading/downloading.

Programming the access code as FFFFFF disables SA access.

Once an SA connection is established, multiple attempts to input the

correct downloading access code (programmed in [012]) is allowed.

The operator is allowed three attempts to enter the correct access

code. If these attempts are unsuccessful, the alarm system discon-

nects and a new attempt must be made.

If cellular or IP paths are used for the SA connection, up to 6 unsuc-

cessful attempts causes a 1-hour SA lockout (See “Remote Lockout

DLS” on page 37).

[410] Automatic DLS/SA Options

[001] – Auto DLS Options

1 – Periodic DLS

ON: Upload/download commands programmed in advance (batch

files) are periodically downloaded to the DLS computer.

See below to program the times and days when this occurs.

NOTE: The computer must be waiting for a call in order for this fea-

ture to work.

OFF: The alarm system does not periodically call the downloading

computer.

3 – DLS on Event Buffer %75 Full

ON: The alarm system automatically calls the downloading computer

with DLS when the Event Buffer 75% full event occurs.

This option is independent of the actual transmission of the Event

Buffer 75% full event (the event does not need to be transmitted for

the panel to perform the automatic upload).

The panel first communicates the Event Buffer 75% full event (if

enabled) using either PSTN or IP and then performs the automatic

download.

OFF: The alarm system does not automatically call the downloading

computer when the Event Buffer 75% full event occurs.

5 – SA on Event Buffer %75 Full

ON: The alarm system automatically calls the downloading computer

with SA when the Event Buffer 75% full event occurs.

This option is independent of the actual transmission of the Event

Buffer 75% full event (the event does not need to be transmitted for

the panel to perform the automatic upload).

The panel first communicates the Event Buffer 75% full event (if

enabled) using either PSTN or IP and then performs the automatic

download.

OFF: The alarm system does not automatically call the downloading

computer when the Event Buffer 75% full event occurs.

[002] Periodic DLS Days

This section is used to program the number of days between periodic

DLS downloads. Valid entries are from 001 to 255 days.

Section 5: Programming

[003] Periodic DLS Time

This section is used to program the time of day periodic DLS down-

load takes place. Time is in 24-hour format and the default is 00:00

(midnight).

[007] Delay Call Window

This section is used to define a user call-up window. Users can only

initiate a downloading session during this window. When a value is

entered in this section, the setting in Periodic DLS Time (see the

option above) is overridden. When 00:00 is entered in this field, the

alarm system initiates a DLS call at the time programmed in Periodic

DLS Time. Start and end times must be defined using 24-hour format

(e.g., 13:30).

5.3.12 Schedule Programming

The sections described below are used for programming scheduled

operating times for PGM command outputs 1-4.

[601]-[604] Programming Schedule 1-4

These sections are used to define schedules for PGM command out-

puts 1-4 operation. When a PGM is configured for timed output oper-

ation, it activates at the programmed start time and will turn off after

the programmed duration. For example, 5 seconds.

Each schedule contains 4 intervals, for PGMs 1-4. Within each inter-

val, a start time and end time can be programmed for each day of the

week. Holiday schedules 1-4 can also be selected.

[101]-[102] Set Start Time/ End Time

Used to program the time of day the schedule interval begins and

ends. (HH:MM). Valid entries are 0000-2359 and 9999. The end time

must be equal to or greater than the start time. 9999 is used when an

interval needs to extend past 24 hours. To do this, program the start

time of the first interval then the end time with 9999. Program the

start time of the second interval as 9999. Select the day of the week

the schedule will end.

NOTE: If two intervals in a schedule are programmed with the same

start time, the schedule follows the interval with the longest end time.

[103] Days Assignment

Used to program the day of the week that the schedule interval starts

and ends. Use the scroll keys to select a day then toggle the option

on. Multiple days of the week can be enabled.

[104] Holiday Assignment

Program PGMs to follow holiday schedule group 1-4. Select (Y) to

enable. If all days of the week for an interval are disabled (N), the

schedule activates on the enabled holidays.

[711]-[714] Holiday Schedules

Use this section to program holiday schedules. During holiday sched-

ules, other scheduled events do not occur. Enter section 711 to 714

for holiday group 1 to 4.

Each of the four available holiday groups can have up to 99 holiday

schedules programmed.

[001]-[099] Holiday Dates 1-99

Program holiday dates in the following format: MMDDYY

MM valid entries are 01 to 12

DD valid entries are 01 to 31

YY valid entries are 00 to 99

5.3.13 Wireless Programming

[804] Wireless Programming

This programming section is used to enroll, program and delete wire-

less devices. Note that the HSM2HOSTx wireless transceiver or RF

model keypad must be installed in order to enroll wireless devices.

[000] – Wireless Device Enrollment

To enroll a wireless device using this method, press and hold the

Enroll button on the device for 2-5 seconds until the LED illuminates

then release the button. The alarm system automatically discovers the

device and the keypad displays a confirmation message. The device

ID, type and the next available zone number are displayed. Press [*]

to accept or scroll to another available zone number. Batteries must

be installed in the wireless device in order to enroll.

NOTE: Ensure wireless signal strength is adequate before mounting

the wireless device. See the instructions provided with the wireless

device for details.

NOTE:

For complete wireless device programming descriptions and

worksheets, see the HSM2Hostx wireless transceiver installation manual.

[850] Cellular Signal Strength

This section is used to view both the cellular signal strength and the

radio technology in use.

Table 5-3: Cellular Technology

5 bars indicate maximum signal strength. 0 bars indicate the commu-

nicator is not connected to the network.

[851] Alternate Communicator Programming

See the alternate communicator installation manual for programming

instructions.

[860] Display Keypad Slot Number

The 2-digit slot number of the keypad being used is displayed in this

read only section.

[861]-[876] Keypad Programming

Use section [861] to [876] to configure keypads 1 to 16. For informa-

tion on keypad programming, refer to the installation sheet supplied

with the keypad.

[899] Template Programming

Template programming allows quick programming of the minimum

functions required for basic operation. This section is used to view

current template programming options and to define certain system

parameters. Press the (#) key to accept the displayed value and

advance to the next option. The following options are available:

• 5-digit Template Code: Displays the current 5-digit template pro-

gramming code (default: 0000). Each digit in the code selects a

set of pre-defined programming options, as described below:

• Digit 1 - zone 1-8 definition options

Diaplay Technology

GP GPRS

ED EDGE

HS HSPA

H+ HSPA

CD CDMA

EV EVDO

Section 5: Programming

• Digit 2 - system EOL options

• Digit 3 - alarm controller communications options

• Digit 4 - reporting code configurations

• Digit 5 - DLS connection options

• Central Station Telephone Number: The phone number used to

contact the central monitoring station (32 character limit).

• Central Station Account Code: The account code used in pro-

gramming section [310]. This is a 4 or 6-digit entry.

• Partition Account Code: Used to identify partition-specific

events. All 4 digits must be entered in order to complete the entry.

• This account code is entered into programming section [310][001].

• DLS Access Code: The 6-digit DLS access code used in pro-

gramming section [403].

• Partition 1 Entry Delay: The 3-digit entry delay duration for parti-

tion 1, in seconds, used in programming [005][001]-[008] option 1.

• Partition 1 Exit Delay: The 3-digit exit delay duration for parti-

tion 1, in seconds, used in programming section [005][001]-

[008] option 3.

• Installer Code: The 4 or 6-digit installer access code used in pro-

gramming section [006][001].

For more information on template programming, see Appendix C:

Template Programming Tables on page 105.

5.3.14 Systems Information

[900] System Information

[000] – Control Panel Version

This read-only section contains the model number, software version,

hardware revision, of the alarm controller. For example, an entry of

1234 is read as version 12.34.

[001]-[524] – Module Information

This read-only section is used to view the model number, software

version, and hardware revision information of the modules enrolled

on the alarm system.

To view information for a specific module, scroll to the correspond-

ing section:

[001]-[016] keypads

[101]-[116] 8-zone expansion module

[201] 8-output expansion module

[460] Alternate Communicator

[461] HSM2Host module

[501]-[504] 1A power supply module

[521]-[524] high-current output modules 1-4

[901] Installer Walk Test Mode Enable/Disable

This mode tests the operation of each detector in the system. Enter

section [901] to initiate a walk test. While in Walk Test mode, the

Ready, Armed, and Trouble LED's on the keypad flash to indicate

that the test is active. When a zone is tripped during the test, a 2-sec-

ond tone sounds on all system keypads to indicate that the zone is

working correctly.

After 10 minutes without zone activity, the alarm system emits 5

beeps every 10 seconds from all keypads. After another 5 minutes of

inactivity, Walk Test terminates automatically.

To manually exit walk test mode, enter [901] again.

5.3.15 Module Programming

Use this section to add, remove and confirm the following modules:

• Keypads See Table 1-2 on page 2

• 8-zone expander module (HSM2108)

• 8-output expander module (HSM2208)

• Power supply (HSM2300)

• 4-output power supply (HSM2204)

• Wireless transceiver (HSM2HOSTx)

Once added, modules are supervised by the system.

[902] Add/Remove Modules

Modules can be enrolled automatically our manually. In either case,

the serial number of the device is used as an identifier.

Select one of the enrollment options described below.

[000] – Auto Enroll Modules

When this mode is selected, the alarm system automatically enrolls

all modules connected to the Corbus. The total number of modules

currently enrolled are displayed on the keypad.

• Enter sub-section [000] to begin auto enrollment of all new

modules. The auto enroll screen will show the following:

• KP = Number of keypad type modules

• IO = Number of zone and output type modules

• M = Number of other type modules

Devices are assigned to the next available slot. The slot assign-

ment can be modified using subsections [002] and [003].

[001] – Enroll Modules

To enroll modules individually:

1. Enter programming section [902]-[001].

2. When prompted, key in the serial number of the module found

on the PCB. An error tone is sounded if an invalid serial number

is used.

3. To cancel enrollment of a module, press [#].

[002] – Module Slot Assignment (LED, LCD, ICON)

This section is used to change the slot number a module is enrolled

in. To change the slot number:

1. Enter programming section [902]-[002].

2. Key in the serial number of the module.

3. When prompted, key in the new two-digit slot number. The pre-

vious slot assignment is replaced with the new one. An error

tone sounds if an invalid slot number is keyed in.

[003] – Edit Module Slot Assignment (LCD Keypad Only)

Like [002], this section is also used to change the slot number of a

module. With this option, however, the serial number is not required.

To change the slot number:

1. Enter programming section [902]-[002].

2. Use the scroll keys to locate the module then press [*] to select.

3. Key in the new two-digit slot number. The previous slot assign-

ment is replaced with the new one. An error tone sounds if an

invalid slot number is keyed in.

Deleting Modules

The following sections are used to remove modules from the system:

• [101] – keypads

• [102] – 8-zone expander modules

• [103] – 8-output expander modules

• [106] – HSM2Host

• [109] – Power supply

• [110] – 4 High Current Output

1. After entering section [902], scroll to the module type you want

to delete (101-110).

2. Press [*] to select the module type then scroll to the specific

module you want to delete.

3. Press [*] to select the module then, when prompted, press [*]

again to delete.

Section 5: Programming

[903] Confirm Module

The following sections are used to confirm enrollment of individual

modules, their serial and slot numbers, and to locate them physically:

• 000 – View All Modules

• 101 – keypads

• 102 – 8-zone expander modules

• 103 – 8-output expander modules

• 106 – HSM2Host

• 109 – Power supply

• 110 – 4 High Current Output

To confirm a module:

1. Enter section [903]>[000] to view all enrolled modules or scroll

to the module type you want to confirm (001-110).

2. Press [*] to select the module type then scroll to the specific

module you want to confirm. Press [*] to enter Confirmation

mode. The module’s serial number and slot number are dis-

played on the keypad and the status LEDs on the device flash.

This continues until confirmation mode for the device is exited

via the [#] key. If communication with a module is lost at the

time of confirmation, a warning message is displayed for 1 sec-

ond before exiting the section.

NOTE: Keypad Blanking (section [016], option 3) must be disabled

to confirm keypads.

5.3.16 Testing

[904] Wireless Placement Test

This test is used to determine RF signal status for wireless devices

and can be performed at a system keypad or at the individual device.

These instructions pertain to testing at the keypad. For instructions

on placement testing at the device, refer to the installation sheet

included with the wireless equipment.

The following test modes are available:

[001]-[128] Placement Test Zones 1-128

Test wireless devices individually by zone (LCD keypads only).

[521]-[528] – Placement Test Repeaters 1-8

Test each enrolled wireless repeater (LCD keypads only).

[551]-[566] – Placement Test Sirens 1-16

Test each enrolled wireless siren (LCD keypads only).

[601]-[632] Placement Test Wireless keys 1-32

Test individual wireless keys. Once in this section, press a button on

the wireless key to begin the test (LCD keypads only).

[701]-[716] – Placement Test Wireless Keypads 1-16

Test each enrolled wireless keypad (LCD keypads only).

Two test results are provided:

• 24-hour: Average status results received during a 24-hour period.

• Now: Signal status results of the current test.

During testing, the Ready and Armed LED's flash to indicate data is

being received. A flashing Trouble LED indicates RF interference.

The following status indicators may be displayed:

Table 5-4 Wireless Device Status Indications

[982] Battery Settings

[000] – Panel Battery Settings

01 – When disabled, the panel battery is charged at 400mA. When

enabled, the battery is charged at 700mA.

[010] – High Current Output Battery

Enables and disables the high-current battery charge option for

HSM2204 1-4.

[020] – 1A Power Supply Battery

Enables and disables the high-current battery charge option for

HSM2300 1-4.

5.3.17 Defaults

[989] Default Master Code

This section is used to default the master code to the factory default.

After entering this section, key in the installer code then 989.

[989][installer code][989] or [*].

[990] Installer Lockout Enable/Disable

When this option is enabled, an installer can not perform a hardware

default; attempts to do so are logged to the event buffer.

An audible indication of installer lockout is provided when powering

up the alarm system (the phone line relay clicks 10 times). Software

default changes can still be made while installer lockout is enabled.

[990][installer code][990] or [*].

[991] Default Keypads

This programming option is used to return system keypads to factory

default settings.

[999] – Default All Keypads

This section resets all system keypads to factory defaults. After

entering this section, key in the installer code then (*) or 991.

[901]- [916] – Default Keypads 1-16

This section resets individual keypads to factory defaults. After

entering this section, select the keypad to default, key in the installer

code then 991 (or press [*]).

[993] Default Alternate Communicator

This section resets the alternate communicator to factory defaults.

Enter [993][installer code][993 or *].

[996] Default Wireless Receiver

This section resets the wireless receiver (HSM2HOSTx) to factory

defaults. Enter [996][installer code][996 or *].

[999] Default System

This section resets the alarm controller to factory defaults. Enter

[999][installer code][999 or *].

Keypad Status

Strong Strong signal strength

Good Good signal strength

Poor Poor signal strength

1-Way The device is operating in 1-way mode only. The alarm

panel cannot configure or control the device

Not Test Displayed as the Now result if no test was performed.

None Always displayed as the 24-hour result when testing

wireless keys.

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

This section provides a detailed list of all available programming options and a place to record custom settings. The index below

lists all available programming sections in numerical order and includes page references to description and worksheet locations.

Programming Options Index

Section Page Section Page

Label Programming

000 Label Programming ..................................................26/57

000 – Language Selection .........................................26/57

001 – 128 – Zone Labels ...........................................26/57

051 – Zone Tamper Label..........................................27/58

052 – Zone Fault Label .............................................27/58

064 – CO Alarm Message .........................................27/58

065 – Fire Alarm Message ........................................27/58

066 – Fail to Arm Event Message .............................27/58

067 – Alarm When Armed Event Message...............27/58

100 – System Label ...................................................27/58

101-108 – Partition 1-8 Labels..................................27/58

201- 208 – Partition Command Output Labels ........27/58

601-604 – Schedule 1- 4 Labels................................27/58

801 – Keypad Labels .................................................27/59

802 – Zone Expander Labels.....................................27/59

803 – Output Expander Labels..................................27/59

806 – HSM2HOSTx Label........................................27/59

809 – Power Supply Label ........................................27/59

810 – High Current Output Supply Label .................27/59

815 – Alternate Communicator Label .......................27/59

820 – Siren Label ......................................................27/59

821 – Repeater Label.................................................27/59

999 – Default Labels .................................................27/60

Zone Programming

001 Zone Type .................................................................27/60

002 – Zone Attributes ......................................................29/60

System Times

005 System Times............................................................30/62

000 – System Area ....................................................30/62

001 – 008 System Times - Partition 1-8....................30/62

901-902 – Daylight Savings Begin/End....................30/62

Access Codes

006 Installer Defined Access Codes ................................30/63

PGM Programming

007 – PGM Programming................................................31/63

000 – Main Bell Partition Assignment ......................31/63

001- 028 – PGM 1-28 Partition.................................31/63

008 – PGM Timer Programming .....................................31/65

009 – PGM Types ............................................................31/66

010 PGM Attributes

000 – Main Bell Mask ...............................................31/67

001-028 PGM 1-28 Attributes...................................34/67

011 PGM Configuration Options.....................................37/70

012 System Lockout ........................................................37/73

System Options

013 System Options 1 ......................................................37/73

1 – NC Loop/EOL .....................................................37/73

2 – DEOL/SEOL .......................................................37/73

3 – Show All Troubles when Armed .........................37/73

4 – Tamper/Faults Do Not show as open...................37/73

5 – Auto-Arm Schedule in [*][6] ..............................37/73

6 – Audible Exit Fault ...............................................37/73

7 – Event Buffer Follows Swinger ............................37/73

8 – Temporal Three Fire Signaling............................37/73

014 System Options 2 ......................................................38/73

1 – Bell Squawk ........................................................38/73

2 – Bell Duration Auto-Arm .....................................38/73

3 – Bell Squawk on Exit............................................38/73

4 – Bell Squawk on Entry..........................................38/73

5 – Bell Squawk on Trouble ......................................38/73

7 – Exit Delay Termination .......................................38/73

8 – Fire Bell Continues..............................................38/73

015 System Options 3 ......................................................38/73

1 – [F] Key ................................................................38/73

2 – [P] Key Annunciation..........................................38/73

3 – Quick Exit............................................................38/73

4 – Quick Arming/Function Key...............................38/73

6 – Master Code Not User Changeable .....................38/73

7 – Telephone Line Monitor Enable ......................... 38/73

8 – TLM Audible When Armed................................ 38/73

016 System Options 4 ..................................................... 38/73

1 – AC Trouble Display ............................................ 38/73

2 – AC Trouble Light Flashes................................... 38/73

3 – Keypad Blanking ................................................ 38/73

4 – Keypad Blanking Requires Code........................ 38/73

5 – Keypad Back Lighting ........................................ 38/73

6 – Power Save Mode ............................................... 38/73

7 – Bypass Display When Armed............................. 38/73

8 – Keypad Tampers Enabled ................................... 38/73

017 System Options 5 ..................................................... 39/73

1 – Chime on Opening .............................................. 38/73

2 – Chime on Closing ............................................... 38/73

4 – Multi-Hit ............................................................. 38/73

5 – Late to Close ....................................................... 38/73

6 – Daylight Savings Time........................................ 38/73

8 – Bell Squawk on Away Arm/Disarm Only........... 38/73

018 System Options 6 ..................................................... 39/73

1 – Test Transmission Exception .............................. 39/73

2 – Realtime Bypass Reporting ................................ 39/73

5 – Keypad Buzzer On Alarm .................................. 39/73

7 – Exit Delay Restart ............................................... 39/73

8 – AC Fail Trouble Beeps ....................................... 39/73

019 System Options 7 ..................................................... 40/73

2 – Latching Troubles ............................................... 39/73

5 – Audible Bus Fault ............................................... 39/73

6 – Duress Codes ...................................................... 39/73

7 – Temperature in Celsius ....................................... 39/73

020 System Options 8 ..................................................... 40/73

3 – [*][8] Access While Armed................................ 39/73

021 System Options 9 ............................................... 40/73

3 – Auto-Arming Bypass .......................................... 40/73

8 – Audible Exit Delay for Stay Arm ....................... 40/73

022 System Options 10 ................................................... 40/73

1 – [F] Key Option.................................................... 40/73

4 – Test Transmission Counter in Hours................... 40/73

5 – Away to Stay Toggle ........................................... 40/73

7 – Trouble Beeps Are Silent.................................... 40/73

8 – Keyswitch Arms in Away Mode......................... 40/73

023 System Options 11.................................................... 40/73

1 – Ready LED Flash for Force Arm........................ 40/73

4 – Access Code Required for [*][1] ........................ 40/73

5 – Access Code Required for [*][2] ........................ 40/73

6 – Access Code Required for [*][3] ........................ 40/73

7 – Access Code Required for [*][4] ........................ 40/73

8 – [*][6] Accessibility Option ................................. 40/73

024 System Options 12 ................................................... 41/73

1 – 50Hz AC / 60 Hz AC.......................................... 40/73

2 – Crystal Timebase................................................. 40/73

3 – AC/DC Inhibits Arming...................................... 40/73

4 – Tampers Inhibit Arming...................................... 40/73

5 – Real Time Clock Option ..................................... 40/73

8 – DLS Disconnect.................................................. 40/73

025 System Options 13 ................................................... 40/73

1 – European Dial ..................................................... 40/73

2 – Force Dial............................................................ 40/73

5 – ID Tone ............................................................... 40/73

6 – Tone Generated-2100Hz ..................................... 40/73

7 – 1 Hour DLS Window .......................................... 40/73

8 – FTC Audible Bell................................................ 40/73

040 User Authentication.................................................. 42/73

01 – User Code/Prox Tag.......................................... 42/73

02 – User Code and Prox Tag ................................... 42/73

041 Access Code Digits .................................................. 42/73

01 – 4-Digit Access Codes........................................ 42/73

02 – 6-Digit Access Codes........................................ 42/73

042 Event Verification..................................................... 42/74

01 – Burglary Verified Counter................................. 42/73

03 – Burglary Verification Selection .........................42/73

151-158 Partition 1-8 Auto-Arm/Disarm ........................42/74

001 – Auto-Arming Times ........................................42/74

002 – Auto-Disarm Times .........................................42/74

003 – Auto-Disarming Holiday Schedule .................42/74

004 – Auto-Arming Pre-Alert ...................................42/74

005 – Auto-Arming Postpone Timer.........................42/74

006 – No Activity Arming Timer..............................42/74

007 – No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer ..............42/74

200 Partition Mask...........................................................42/77

001 – Partition 1 to 8 Enable Mask ...........................42/77

201-208 Partition 1-8 Zone Assignment ..................43/78

300 Panel/Receiver Communications Path......................43/79

301 Phone Number Programming ...................................43/79

304 Call Waiting Cancel String .......................................43/79

Event Reporting

307 Zone Reporting .........................................................43/81

308 Event Reporting ........................................................43/81

001 – Miscellaneous Alarm 1....................................44/81

002 – Miscellaneous Alarm 2....................................44/81

011 – Priority Alarms ................................................44/81

021 – Fire Alarms 1...................................................44/81

101 – Tamper Events .................................................44/81

201 – Open/Close Events 1 .......................................44/81

202 – Open/Close Events 2 .......................................44/81

211 – Miscellaneous Open/Close Events ..................44/81

221 – Bypass Events..................................................44/81

301 – Panel Events 1 .................................................45/81

302 – Panel Events 2 .................................................45/81

305 – Panel Events 5 .................................................45/81

311 – Maintenance Events 1......................................45/81

312 – Maintenance Events 2 .....................................45/81

313 – Maintenance Events 3 .....................................45/81

314 – Maintenance Events 4 .....................................45/81

321 – Receiver Events...............................................45/81

331 – Module Events 1..............................................45/81

332 – Module Events 2..............................................46/81

335 – Module Events 5..............................................46/81

351 – Alternate Communicator .................................46/82

352 – Alternate Communicator 2 ..............................46/82

354 – Alternate Communicator 4 ..............................46/82

355 – Alternate Communicator 5 ..............................46/82

361 – Wireless Device Events...................................46/82

401– System Test Events...........................................46/82

Communications

309 System Call Direction...............................................46/82

001– Maintenance Events .........................................47/82

002 – Test Transmission Events ................................47/82

310 Account Codes..........................................................47/82

311-318 Partition 1-8 Call Direction ...............................47/82

350 Communicator Formats ...........................................47/84

377 Communication Variables.........................................47/84

001 – Swinger Shutdown Counters ...........................47/84

002 – Communication Delays ...................................48/84

003 – Periodic Test Transmission Cycle ...................48/84

004 – Periodic Test Transmission Time of Day ........48/84

011 – Maximum Dialing Attempts ...........................48/84

012 – Delay Between PSTN Attempts ......................48/84

013 – Delay Between Force Attempts.......................48/84

014 – Post Dial Wait for Handshake .........................48/84

015 – T-Link Wait for Ack ........................................48/84

016 – IP/Cellular Fault Check Timer ........................48/84

380 Communicator Option 1 ...........................................48/84

381 Communicator Option 2 ...........................................49/84

382 Communicator Option 3 ...........................................49/84

383 Communicator Option 4 ...........................................50/84

384 Communicator Backup Options................................50/84

DLS Programming

401 DLS/SA Options .......................................................50/85

402 PSTN DLS Phone Number.......................................51/85

403 DLS Access Code .....................................................51/85

404 DLS/SA Panel ID......................................................51/85

405 PSTN Double Call Timer .........................................51/85

406 PSTN Number of Rings to Answer On ....................51/85

407 SA Access Code........................................................51/85

410 Automatic DLS Options ...........................................51/85

001 – Automatic DLS Toggle Options ..................... 51/85

002 – Periodic DLS Days ......................................... 51/85

003 – Periodic DLS Time ......................................... 52/85

007 – Delay Call Window ........................................ 52/85

Schedule Programming

601 Programming Schedule ............................................ 52/85

711-714 Holiday Schedules............................................. 52/88

Wireless Programming

804 Wireless Programming ............................................. 52/89

850 Cellular Signal Strength ........................................... 52/89

851 Alternate Communicator Programming ................... 52/89

Keypad Programming

860 Keypad Slot Number................................................ 52/89

861-876 Keypad Programming ....................................... 52/90

000 – Keypad Partition Mask ................................... 12/90

001-005 – Function Key 1- 5 Assignment................ 52/90

011 – Keypad I/O ..................................................... 52/90

012 – Local PGM Output Timer............................... 52/90

021 – Keypad Option 1 ............................................. 52/90

022 – Keypad Option 2 ............................................. 52/90

023 – Keypad Option 3 ............................................. 52/90

030 – LCD Message.................................................. 52/90

031 – Download LCD Message Duration................. 52/90

041 – Indoor Temperature Zone Entry...................... 52/90

042 – Outdoor Temperature Zone Entry................... 52/90

101-228 – Door Chime Sound-Zone 1-128 .............. 52/90

899 Template Programming ............................................ 52/91

System Information and Testing

900 System Information .................................................. 53/91

901 Installer Walk Test.................................................... 53/91

Module Programming

902 Add/Remove Modules.............................................. 53/91

000 – Auto-Enroll All Modules ................................ 53/91

001 – Enroll Modules ............................................... 53/91

002 – Slot Assignment.............................................. 53/91

003 – Edit Module Slot Assignment......................... 53/91

101-110 – Delete Modules........................................ 53/91

903 Confirm Modules ..................................................... 54/92

Testing

904 Wireless Placement Test........................................... 54/92

Battery Settings

982 Battery Settings ........................................................ 54/92

000– Panel Battery Settings...................................... 54/92

010 – High Current Output Battery Settings ............ 54/92

020 – 1A Power Supply Battery Settings ................. 54/92

Defaults

989 Default Master Code ................................................ 54/92

990 Installer Lockout Enable .......................................... 54/92

991 Default Keypads....................................................... 54/92

999 – Default all Keypads......................................... 54/92

901-916 – Default Keypad 1-16 ............................... 54/92

993 Default Alt Comm.................................................... 54/92

996 Default Wireless Receiver........................................ 54/92

999 Default System ......................................................... 54/92

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

Label Programming

[000] Label Programming Description on page 26

000 – Language Selection (2-digit decimal; Default: 01)

01 – English 06 – Dutch 11 – Swedish 16 – Turkish 21 – Russian 26 – Slovakian

02 – Spanish 07 – Polish 12 – Norwegian 18 – Croatian 22 – Bulgarian 27 – Serbian

03 – Portuguese 08 – Czech 13 – Danish 19 – Hungarian 23 – Latvian 28 – Estonian

04 – French 09 – Finish 14 – Hebrew 20 – Romanian 24 – Lithuanian 29 – Slovenian

05 – Italian 10 – German 15 – Greek 25 – Ukrainian

[000] 001 – Zone Labels (2 x 14 Characters) Description on page 26

001: 044: 087:

002: 045: 088:

003: 046: 089:

004: 047: 090:

005: 048: 091:

006: 049: 092:

007: 050: 093:

008: 051: 094:

009: 052: 095:

010: 053: 096:

011: 054: 097:

012: 055: 098:

013: 056: 099:

014: 057: 100:

015: 058: 101:

016: 059: 102:

017: 060: 103:

018: 061: 104:

019: 062: 105:

020: 063: 106:

021: 064: 107:

022: 065: 108:

023: 066: 109:

024: 067: 110:

025: 068: 111:

026: 069: 112:

027: 070: 113:

028: 071: 114:

029: 072: 115:

030: 073: 116:

031: 074: 117:

032: 075: 118:

033: 076: 119:

034: 077: 120:

035: 078: 121:

036: 079: 122:

037: 080: 123:

038: 081: 124:

039: 082: 125:

040: 083: 126:

041: 084: 127:

042: 085: 128:

043: 086:

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

[000] 051 – Zone Tamper Label (1 x 14 Characters):

052 – Zone Fault Label (1 x 14 Characters):

064 – CO Alarm Message (2 x 14 Characters):

065 – Fire Alarm Message (2 x 14 Characters):

066 – Fail to Arm Event Message (2 x 16 Characters):

067 – Alarm When Armed Event Message (2 x 16 Characters):

100 – System Label (1 x 14 Characters):

[000] 101 – Partition 1 Label (1 x 14 Characters):

102 – Partition 2 Label (1 x 14 Characters):

103 – Partition 3 Label (1 x 14 Characters):

104 – Partition 4 Label (1 x 14 Characters):

105 – Partition 5 Label (1 x 14 Characters):

106 – Partition 6 Label (1 x 14 Characters):

107 – Partition 7 Label (1 x 14 Characters):

108 – Partition 8 Label (1 x 14 Characters):

[000] 201 – Partition 1 Command Output Labels 001 – Partition 1 Command Output 1:

(2 X 14 ASCII) 002 – Partition 1 Command Output 2:

Descriptions on page 27 003 – Partition 1 Command Output 3:

004 – Partition 1 Command Output 4:

202 – Partition 2 Command Output Labels 001 – Partition 2 Command Output 1:

002 – Partition 2 Command Output 2:

(2 X 14 ASCII) 003 – Partition 2 Command Output 3:

004 – Partition 2 Command Output 4:

203 – Partition 3 Command Output Labels 001 – Partition 3 Command Output 1:

002 – Partition 3 Command Output 2:

(2 X 14 ASCII) 003 – Partition 3 Command Output 3:

004 – Partition 3 Command Output 4:

204 – Partition 4 Command Output Labels 001 – Partition 4 Command Output 1:

002 – Partition 4 Command Output 2:

(2 X 14 ASCII) 003 – Partition 4 Command Output 3:

004 – Partition 4 Command Output 4:

205 – Partition 5 Command Output Labels 001 – Partition 5 Command Output 1:

002 – Partition 5 Command Output 2:

(2 X 14 ASCII) 003 – Partition 5 Command Output 3:

004 – Partition 5 Command Output 4:

206 – Partition 6 Command Output Labels 001 – Partition 6 Command Output 1:

002 – Partition 6 Command Output 2:

(2 X 14 ASCII) 003 – Partition 6 Command Output 3:

004 – Partition 6 Command Output 4:

207 – Partition 7 Command Output Labels 001 – Partition 7 Command Output 1:

002 – Partition 7 Command Output 2:

(2 X 14 ASCII) 003 – Partition 7 Command Output 3:

004 – Partition 7 Command Output 4:

208 – Partition 8 Command Output Labels 001 – Partition 8 Command Output 1:

002 – Partition 8 Command Output 2:

(2 X 14 ASCII) 003 – Partition 8 Command Output 3:

004 – Partition 8 Command Output 4:

[000] 601 – Schedule 1 Label (1 X 16 ASCII): Descriptions on page 27

602 – Schedule 2 Label (1 X 16 ASCII):

603 – Schedule 3 Label (1 X 16 ASCII):

604 – Schedule 4 Label (1 X 16 ASCII):

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

[000] 801 – Keypad Labels (1 X 14 ASCII) Description on page 27

001 – Keypad 1 Label: 009 – Keypad 9 Label:

002 – Keypad 2 Label: 010 – Keypad 10 Label:

003 – Keypad 3 Label: 011 – Keypad 11 Label:

004 – Keypad 4 Label: 012 – Keypad 12 Label:

005 – Keypad 5 Label: 013 – Keypad 13 Label:

006 – Keypad 6 Label: 014 – Keypad 14 Label:

007 – Keypad 7 Label: 015 – Keypad 15 Label:

008 – Keypad 8 Label: 016 – Keypad 16 Label:

[000] 802 – Zone Expander Labels (1 x 14 ASCII): Description on page 27

001– Zone Expander 1 Label: 009– Zone Expander 9 Label:

002– Zone Expander 2 Label: 010– Zone Expander 10 Label:

003– Zone Expander 3 Label: 011– Zone Expander 11 Label:

004– Zone Expander 4 Label: 012– Zone Expander 12 Label:

005– Zone Expander 5 Label: 013– Zone Expander 13 Label:

006– Zone Expander 6 Label: 014– Zone Expander 14 Label:

007– Zone Expander 7 Label: 015– Zone Expander 15 Label:

008– Zone Expander 8 Label:

[000] 803 – Output Expander Label (1 X 14 ASCII) Description on page 27

001– Output Expander 1 Label: 009– Output Expander 9 Label:

002– Output Expander 2 Label: 010– Output Expander 10 Label:

003– Output Expander 3 Label: 011– Output Expander 11 Label:

004– Output Expander 4 Label: 012– Output Expander 12 Label:

005– Output Expander 5 Label: 013– Output Expander 13 Label:

006– Output Expander 6 Label: 014– Output Expander 14 Label:

007– Output Expander 7 Label: 015– Output Expander 15 Label:

008– Output Expander 8 Label: 016– Output Expander 16 Label:

[000] 806 – HSM2HOSTx Label: (1 X 14 ASCII) Description on page 27

[000] 809 – Power Supply Label 001 – Power Supply 1 Label:

(1 X 14 ASCII) 002 – Power Supply 2 Label:

Description on page 27 003 – Power Supply 3 Label:

004 – Power Supply 4 Label:

[000] 810 – High-Current Output Supply Label

(1 X 14 ASCII):

001 – High-Current Output Supply 1 Label:

002 – High-Current Output Supply 2 Label:

Description on page 27 003 – High-Current Output Supply 3 Label:

004 – High-Current Output Supply 4 Label:

[000] 815 – Alt. Comm Label: (1 X 14 ASCII) Description on page 27

[000] 820 – Siren Labels (1 X 14 ASCII):

Description on page 27

001– Siren 1 Label: 009– Siren 9 Label:

002– Siren 2 Label: 010– Siren 10 Label:

003– Siren 3 Label: 011– Siren 11 Label:

004– Siren 4 Label: 012– Siren 12 Label:

005– Siren 5 Label: 013– Siren 13 Label:

006– Siren 6 Label: 014– Siren 14 Label:

007– Siren 7 Label: 015– Siren 15 Label:

008– Siren 8 Label: 016– Siren 16 Label:

[000] 821 – Repeater Label 001– Repeater 1 Label:

(1 X 14 ASCII): 002– Repeater 2 Label:

Description on page 27 003– Repeater 3 Label:

004– Repeater 4 Label:

005– Repeater 5 Label:

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

Zone Setup

006– Repeater 6 Label:

007– Repeater 7 Label:

008– Repeater 8 Label:

[000] 999 – Default Labels

Description on page 27

[001] Zone Type

Available Zone Types

Default = 000

Description on page 27

* Not UL evaluated

000 – Null Zone

001 – Delay 1

002 – Delay 2

003 – Instant

004 – Interior

005 – Interior Stay/Away

006 – Delay Stay/Away

007 – Delayed 24-Hour

Fire

008 – Standard 24-Hour

Fire

009 – Instant Stay/Away

010 – Interior Delay

011 – Day Zone

012 – Night Zone

017 – 24-Hour Burglary

018 – 24-Hour Bell/

Buzzer

023 – 24-Hour Supervi-

sory

024 – 24-Hour Supervi-

sory Buzzer

025 – Auto Verified Fire

027 – Fire Supervisory

040 – 24-Hour Gas

041 – 24-Hour CO

042 – 24-Hour Holdup*

043 – 24-Hour Panic

045 – 24-Hour Heat

046 – 24-Hour Medical

047 – 24-Hour Emer-

gency

048 – 24-Hour Sprin-

kler*

049 – 24-Hour Flood

051 – 24-Hour Latching

Tamper

052 – 24-Hour Non-

Alarm

056 – 24-Hour High

Temperature

057 – 24 Hour Low Tem-

perature

060 – 24-Hour Non-

Latching Tamper

066 – Momentary Key-

switch Arm

067 – Maintained Key-

switch Arm

068 – Momentary Key-

switch Disarm

069 – Maintained Key-

switch Disarm

071 – Door Bell

[002] Zone Attributes

Available Zone Attributes

See next page for defaults

Description on page 29

1 – Bell Audible

2 – Bell Steady

3 – Door Chime

4 – Bypass Enabled

5 – Force Arm

6 – Swinger Shutdown

7 – Transmission Delay

8 – Burglary Verification

9 – Normally Closed

EOL

10 – Single EOL

11 – Double EOL

12 – Fast Loop/Normal Loop Response

Record Zone Settings:

Zone Type Att. Zone Type Att. Zone Type Att. Zone Type Att. Zone Type Att.

001: 027: 053: 079: 105:

002: 028: 054: 080: 106:

003: 029: 055: 081: 107:

004: 030: 056: 082: 108

005: 031: 057: 083: 109:

006: 032: 058: 084: 110:

007: 033: 059: 085: 111:

008: 034: 060: 086: 112:

009: 035: 061: 087: 113:

010: 036: 062: 088: 114:

011: 037: 063: 089: 115:

012: 038: 064: 090: 116:

013: 039: 065: 091: 117:

014: 040: 066: 092: 118:

015: 041: 067: 093: 119:

016: 042: 068: 094: 120:

017: 043: 069: 095: 121:

018: 044: 070: 096: 122:

019: 045: 071: 097: 123:

020: 046: 072: 098: 124:

021: 047: 073: 099: 125:

022: 048: 074: 100: 126:

023: 049: 075: 101: 127:

024: 050: 076: 102: 128:

025: 051: 077: 103:

026: 052: 078: 104:

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

Zone Attribute Defaults (Description on page 29)

Zone Attributes

Zone Type

000 Null Zone

001 Delay 1  

002 Delay 2  

003 Instant  

004 Interior 

005 Interior Stay/Away  

006 Delay Stay/Away  

007 Delayed 24-Hour Fire  

008 Standard 24-Hour Fire 

009 Instant Stay/Away 

010 Interior Delay 

011 Day Zone 

012 Night Zone 

016 Final Door Set  

017 24-Hour Burglary  

018 24-Hour Bell/Buzzer   

023 24-Hour Supervisory 

024 24-Hour Supervisory Buzzer 

025 Auto Verify Fire 

027 Fire Supervisory

040 24-Hour Gas 

041 24-Hour CO 

042 24-Hour Holdup 

043 24-Hour Panic  

045 24-Hour Heat 

046 24-Hour Medical  

047 24-Hour Emergency  

048 24-Hour Sprinkler  

049 24-Hour Flood 

051 24-Hour Latching Tamper  

052 24-Hour Non-Alarm 

056 24 Hour High Temperature  

057 24 Hour Low Temperature 

060 24-Hr Non-Latching Tamper  

066 Momentary Keyswitch Arm 

067 Maintained Keyswitch Arm 

068 Momentary Keyswitch Disarm 

069 Maintained Keyswitch Disarm 

071 Door Bell 

2 – Bell Steady

3 – Chime Function

6 – Swinger Shutdown

7 – Transmission Delay

9 – Normally Closed EOL

5 – Force Arm

10 – Single EOL

11 – Double EOL

12 – Fast/Normal Loop Response

1 – Bell Audible

4 – Bypass Enabled

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

System Times

[005] System Times

000 – System Area Bell Cutoff (Default: 004):

(3-Digit Decimal)

Description on page 30 Burglary Verification Timer (Default: 060):

Zone Loop Response Time (Default: 250):

Automatic Clock Adjust (Default: 060):

001 – Partition 1 Timer Entry Delay 1 (Default: 030):

Entry Delay 2 (Default: 045):

Exit Delay (Default: 120):

002 – Partition 2 Timer

See partition 1 for

defaults

Entry Delay 1:

Entry Delay 2:

Exit Delay:

003 – Partition 3 Timer

See partition 1 for

defaults

Entry Delay 1:

Entry Delay 2:

Exit Delay:

004 – Partition 4 Timer

See partition 1 for

defaults

Entry Delay 1:

Entry Delay 2:

Exit Delay:

005 – Partition 5 Timer

See partition 1 for

defaults

Entry Delay 1:

Entry Delay 2:

Exit Delay:

006 – Partition 6 Timer

See partition 1 for

defaults

Entry Delay 1:

Entry Delay 2:

Exit Delay:

007 – Partition 7 Timer

See partition 1 for

defaults

Entry Delay 1:

Entry Delay 2:

Exit Delay:

008 – Partition 8 Timer

See partition 1 for

defaults

Entry Delay 1:

Entry Delay 2:

Exit Delay:

901 – Daylight Savings

Begin

Month:

Week:

Day:

Hour:

Increment:

902 – Daylight Savings

End

Month:

Week:

Day:

Hour:

Increment:

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

Access Codes

PGM Programming

006 Installer-Defined Codes 001 – Installer Code (Default:555555):

(4/6-Digit Decimal) 002 – Master Code (Default:123456):

Description on page 30 003 – Maintenance Code (Default: AAAA00):

[007] PGM Programming

000 – Main Bell Partition Assignment

(001-164)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y

001 – PGM Partition

Assignment

PGM Partition PGM Partition PGM Partition PGM Partition

001: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

014: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

027: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

040: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

Default: Partition 1

on. All others off

002: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

015: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

028: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

041: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

003: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

016: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

029: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

042: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

004: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

017: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

030: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

043: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

005: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

018: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

031: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

044: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

Description on page

006: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

019: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

032: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

045: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

007: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

020: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

033: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

046: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

008: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

021: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

034: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

047: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

009: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

022: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

035: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

048: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

010: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

023: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

036: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

049: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

011: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

024: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

037: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

050: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

012: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

025: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

038: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

051: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

013: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

026: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

039: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

052: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

001 – PGM Partition PGM Partition PGM Partition PGM Partition PGM Partition

053: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

081: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

109: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

137: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

Default: Partition 1

on. All others off

054: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

082: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

110: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

138: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

055: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

083: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

111: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

139: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

056: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

084: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

112: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

140: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

057: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

085: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

113: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

141: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

Description on page

058: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

086: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

114: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

142: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

059: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

087: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

115: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

143: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

060: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

088: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

116: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

144: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

061: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

089: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

117: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

145: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

062: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

090: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

118: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

146: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

063: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

091: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

119: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

147: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

064: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

092: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

120: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

148: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

065: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

093: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

121: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

149: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

066: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

094: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

122: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

150: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

067: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

095: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

123: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

151: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

068: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

096: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

124: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

152: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

069: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

097: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

125: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

153: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

070: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

098: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

126: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

154: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

071: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

099: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

127: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

155: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

072: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

100: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

128: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

156: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

073: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

101: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

129: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

157: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

074: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

102: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

130: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

158: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

075: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

103: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

131: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

159: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

076: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

104: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

132: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

160: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

077: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

105: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

133: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

161: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

078: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

106: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

134: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

162: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

079: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

107: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

135: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

163: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

080: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

108: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

136: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

164: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

YN N N N N N N

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

[008] PGM Timer

Programming

000 – PGM Timers Minutes or Seconds:  Minutes  Seconds

(3-Digit Decimal)

Valid Range: 001-255

Default: 005

001 – PGM 1: 042 – PGM 42: 083 – PGM 83: 124 – PGM 124:

002 – PGM 2: 043 – PGM 43: 084 – PGM 84: 125 – PGM 125:

003 – PGM 3: 044 – PGM 44: 085 – PGM 85: 126 – PGM 126:

004 – PGM 4: 045 – PGM 45: 086 – PGM 86: 127 – PGM 127:

Description on page 31 005 – PGM 5: 046 – PGM 46: 087 – PGM 87: 128 – PGM 128:

006 – PGM 6: 047 – PGM 47: 088 – PGM 88: 129 – PGM 129:

007 – PGM 7: 048 – PGM 48: 089 – PGM 89: 130 – PGM 130:

008 – PGM 8: 049 – PGM 49: 090 – PGM 90: 131 – PGM 131:

009 – PGM 9: 050 – PGM 50: 091 – PGM 91: 132 – PGM 132:

010 – PGM 10: 051 – PGM 51: 092 – PGM 92: 133 – PGM 133:

011 – PGM 11: 052 – PGM 52: 093 – PGM 93: 134 – PGM 134:

012 – PGM 12: 053 – PGM 53: 094 – PGM 94: 135 – PGM 135:

013 – PGM 13: 054 – PGM 54: 095 – PGM 95: 136 – PGM 136:

014 – PGM 14: 055 – PGM 55: 096 – PGM 96: 137 – PGM 137:

015 – PGM 15: 056 – PGM 56: 097 – PGM 97: 138 – PGM 138:

016 – PGM 16: 057 – PGM 57: 098 – PGM 98: 139 – PGM 139:

017 – PGM 17: 058 – PGM 58: 099 – PGM 99: 140 – PGM 140:

018 – PGM 18: 059 – PGM 59: 100 – PGM 100: 141 – PGM 141:

019 – PGM 19: 060 – PGM 60: 101 – PGM 101: 142 – PGM 142:

020 – PGM 20: 061 – PGM 61: 102 – PGM 102: 143 – PGM 143:

021 – PGM 21: 062 – PGM 62: 103 – PGM 103: 144 – PGM 144:

022 – PGM 22: 063 – PGM 63: 104 – PGM 104: 145 – PGM 145:

023 – PGM 23: 064 – PGM 64: 105 – PGM 105: 146 – PGM 146:

024 – PGM 24: 065 – PGM 65: 106 – PGM 106: 147 – PGM 147:

025 – PGM 25: 066 – PGM 66: 107 – PGM 107: 148 – PGM 148:

026 – PGM 26: 067 – PGM 67: 108 – PGM 108: 149 – PGM 149:

027 – PGM 27: 068 – PGM 68: 109 – PGM 109: 150 – PGM 150:

028 – PGM 28: 069 – PGM 69: 110 – PGM 110: 151 – PGM 151:

029 – PGM 29: 070 – PGM 70: 111 – PGM 111: 152 – PGM 152:

030 – PGM 30: 071 – PGM 71: 112 – PGM 112: 153 – PGM 153:

031 – PGM 31: 072 – PGM 72: 113 – PGM 113: 154 – PGM 154:

032 – PGM 32: 073 – PGM 73: 114 – PGM 114: 155 – PGM 155:

033 – PGM 33: 074 – PGM 74: 115 – PGM 115: 156 – PGM 156:

034 – PGM 34: 075 – PGM 75: 116 – PGM 116: 157 – PGM 157:

035 – PGM 35: 076 – PGM 76: 117 – PGM 117: 158 – PGM 158:

036 – PGM 36: 077 – PGM 77: 118 – PGM 118: 159 – PGM 159:

037 – PGM 37: 078 – PGM 78: 119 – PGM 119: 160 – PGM 160:

038 – PGM 38: 079 – PGM 79: 120 – PGM 120: 161 – PGM 161:

039 – PGM 39 080 – PGM 80: 121 – PGM 121: 162 – PGM 162:

040 – PGM 40: 081 – PGM 81: 122 – PGM 122: 163 – PGM 163:

041 – PGM 41: 082 – PGM 82: 123 – PGM 123: 164 – PGM 164:

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

[009] PGM Types

(3-Digit Decimal)

Description on page 31

100 – Null PGM

101 – Burg and Fire Bell Fol-

lower

102 – Delayed Fire/ Burg

103 – Sensor Reset[*][7][2]

104 – 2-Wire Smoke

109 – Courtesy Pulse

111 – Keypad Buzzer Follow

114 – Ready To Arm

115 – System Armed Status

116 – Away Armed Status

117 – Stay Armed Status

120 – Away Armed/no Bypass

Status

121 – Command Output 1

122 – Command Output 2

123 – Command Output 3

124 – Command Output 4

129 – Partition Status Alarm

Memory

132 – Holdup Output

134 – 24Hr Silent

135 – 24Hr Audible Input

146 – TLM and Alarm

147 – Kissoff

148 – Ground Start

149 – Alt. Communicator

155 – System Trouble

156 – Latched System Event

157 – System Tamper

161 – DC Trouble

165 – Prox Used

175 – Bell Status and Pro-

gramming Access

Output

176 – Remote Operation

184 – Open After Alarm

200 – Zone Follower

201 – Follower-Zones 1-8

202 – Follower-Zones 9-16

203 – Follower-Zones 17-24

204 – Follower-Zones 25-32

205 – Follower-Zones 33-40

206 – Follower-Zones 41-48

207 – Follower-Zones 49-56

208 – Follower-Zones 57-64

209 – Follower-Zones 65-72

210 – Follower-Zones 73-80

211 – Follower-Zones 81-88

212 – Follower-Zones 89-96

213 – Follower-Zones 97-104

214 – Follower-Zones 105-112

215 – Follower-Zones 113-120

216 – Follower-Zones 120-128

(3-Digit Decimal)

Valid Range: 001-255

Default: 005

001 – PGM 1: 042 – PGM 42: 083 – PGM 83: 124 – PGM 124:

002 – PGM 2: 043 – PGM 43: 084 – PGM 84: 125 – PGM 125:

003 – PGM 3: 044 – PGM 44: 085 – PGM 85: 126 – PGM 126:

004 – PGM 4: 045 – PGM 45: 086 – PGM 86: 127 – PGM 127:

Description on page 31 005 – PGM 5: 046 – PGM 46: 087 – PGM 87: 128 – PGM 128:

006 – PGM 6: 047 – PGM 47: 088 – PGM 88: 129 – PGM 129:

007 – PGM 7: 048 – PGM 48: 089 – PGM 89: 130 – PGM 130:

008 – PGM 8: 049 – PGM 49: 090 – PGM 90: 131 – PGM 131:

009 – PGM 9: 050 – PGM 50: 091 – PGM 91: 132 – PGM 132:

010 – PGM 10: 051 – PGM 51: 092 – PGM 92: 133 – PGM 133:

011 – PGM 11: 052 – PGM 52: 093 – PGM 93: 134 – PGM 134:

012 – PGM 12: 053 – PGM 53: 094 – PGM 94: 135 – PGM 135:

013 – PGM 13: 054 – PGM 54: 095 – PGM 95: 136 – PGM 136:

014 – PGM 14: 055 – PGM 55: 096 – PGM 96: 137 – PGM 137:

015 – PGM 15: 056 – PGM 56: 097 – PGM 97: 138 – PGM 138:

016 – PGM 16: 057 – PGM 57: 098 – PGM 98: 139 – PGM 139:

017 – PGM 17: 058 – PGM 58: 099 – PGM 99: 140 – PGM 140:

018 – PGM 18: 059 – PGM 59: 100 – PGM 100: 141 – PGM 141:

019 – PGM 19: 060 – PGM 60: 101 – PGM 101: 142 – PGM 142:

020 – PGM 20: 061 – PGM 61: 102 – PGM 102: 143 – PGM 143:

021 – PGM 21: 062 – PGM 62: 103 – PGM 103: 144 – PGM 144:

022 – PGM 22: 063 – PGM 63: 104 – PGM 104: 145 – PGM 145:

023 – PGM 23: 064 – PGM 64: 105 – PGM 105: 146 – PGM 146:

024 – PGM 24: 065 – PGM 65: 106 – PGM 106: 147 – PGM 147:

025 – PGM 25: 066 – PGM 66: 107 – PGM 107: 148 – PGM 148:

026 – PGM 26: 067 – PGM 67: 108 – PGM 108: 149 – PGM 149:

027 – PGM 27: 068 – PGM 68: 109 – PGM 109: 150 – PGM 150:

028 – PGM 28: 069 – PGM 69: 110 – PGM 110: 151 – PGM 151:

029 – PGM 29: 070 – PGM 70: 111 – PGM 111: 152 – PGM 152:

030 – PGM 30: 071 – PGM 71: 112 – PGM 112: 153 – PGM 153:

031 – PGM 31: 072 – PGM 72: 113 – PGM 113: 154 – PGM 154:

032 – PGM 32: 073 – PGM 73: 114 – PGM 114: 155 – PGM 155:

033 – PGM 33: 074 – PGM 74: 115 – PGM 115: 156 – PGM 156:

034 – PGM 34: 075 – PGM 75: 116 – PGM 116: 157 – PGM 157:

035 – PGM 35: 076 – PGM 76: 117 – PGM 117: 158 – PGM 158:

036 – PGM 36: 077 – PGM 77: 118 – PGM 118: 159 – PGM 159:

037 – PGM 37: 078 – PGM 78: 119 – PGM 119: 160 – PGM 160:

038 – PGM 38: 079 – PGM 79: 120 – PGM 120: 161 – PGM 161:

039 – PGM 39 080 – PGM 80: 121 – PGM 121: 162 – PGM 162:

040 – PGM 40: 081 – PGM 81: 122 – PGM 122: 163 – PGM 163:

041 – PGM 41: 082 – PGM 82: 123 – PGM 123: 164 – PGM 164:

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

[010] PGM Attributes  Partition 1 Mask

000 – Main Bell Mask  01 – Fire Alarm  03 – Burglary Alarm  06 – Bell Squawks

Description on page 33  02 – CO Alarm  04 – Flood Alarm

001-164 PGM Attributes 100 – Null PGM

PGM 1-164: 101 – Fire and Burglary  01 – True Output

102 – Delay Fire and Burg  01 – True Output

103 – Sensor Reset

[*][7][2]

 03 – Code Required

109 – Courtesy Pulse  01 – True Output

111 – Keypad Buzzer

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Entry Delay

 10 – Exit Delay

 11 – Door Chime

 12 – Keypad Buzzer Zone

 13 – Audible Exit Zone

 14 – Auto-Arm Pre-Alert

114 – Ready To Arm  01 – True Output

115 – Armed Status  01 – True Output

116 – Armed Away Mode  01 – True Output

117 – Armed Stay Mode  01 – True Output

121 – Command Output 1  01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 03 – Code Required

 Schedule 00

122 – Command Output 2  01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 03 – Code Required

 Schedule 00

123 – Command Output 3  01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 03 – Code Required

 Schedule 00

124 – Command Output 4  01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 03 – Code Required

 Schedule 00

129 – Partition Status

Alarm Memory

 01 – True Output

132 – Holdup Output  01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

146 – TLM And Alarm  01 – True Output

147 – Kissoff Output  01 – True Output

148 – Ground Start  01 – True Output

149 – Alternate

Communicator

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 04 – Fire Alarm

 05 – Panic Alarm

 06 – Burglary Alarm

 07 – Open/Close

 08 – Zone Auto Bypass

 09 – Medical Alarm

 10 – Burglary Verified

 11 – Open After Alarm

 12 – Emergency Alarm

 13 – Duress Alarm

 14 – Holdup Verified

155 – System Trouble  01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 04 – Service Required

 05 – Loss of Clock

 06 – AC Fail

 07 – DC Fail

 08 – TLM Trouble

 09 – FT

 11 – Zone Fault

 12 – Zone Tamper

 13 – Zone Low Battery

 10 – Ethernet

156 – Latched System

Event

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 04 – Fire Alarm

 05 – Panic Alarm

 06 – Burglary Alarm

 07 – Medical Alarm

 08 – Supervisory

 09 – Priority Event

 10 – Holdup

 11 – Duress Alarm

 12 – Emergency Alarm

 13 – Fire Supervisory

 14 – Fire Trouble

 15 – CO Alarm

157 – System Tamper  01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Module Tamper

 10 – Zone Tampers

161 – DC Trouble  01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Battery Low

 10 – Battery Absent

165 – Prox Used  01 – True Output

175 – Bell Prog Access  01 – True Output

176 – Remote Operation  01 – True Output

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

[010] 184 – Open After Alarm  01 – True Output  PGM Timer

201 PGM 1 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 1-008

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

202 PGM 2 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 9-16

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

203 PGM 3 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 17-24

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

204 PGM 4 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 25-32

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

205 PGM 5 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 33-40

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

206 PGM 6 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 41-48

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

207 PGM 7 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 49-56

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

208 PGM 8 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 57-64

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

209 PGM 9 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 65-72

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

210 PGM 10 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 73-80

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

211 PGM 11 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 81-88

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

212 PGM 12 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 89-96

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

213 PGM 13 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 97-104

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

214 PGM 14 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 105-112

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

215 PGM 15 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 113-120

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

216 PGM 16 Zone Fol-

lower

Zones 121-128

 01 – True Output

 02 – Timed Output

 09 – Zone Terminal 1

 10 – Zone Terminal 2

 11 – Zone Terminal 3

 12 – Zone Terminal 4

 13 – Zone Terminal 5

 14 – Zone Terminal 6

 15 – Zone Terminal 7

 16 – Zone Terminal 8

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

[010] PGM Attribute Assignment:

(3-Digit Decimal)

Valid Range: 001-255

Default: 005

001 – PGM 1: 042 – PGM 42: 083 – PGM 83: 124 – PGM 124:

002 – PGM 2: 043 – PGM 43: 084 – PGM 84: 125 – PGM 125:

003 – PGM 3: 044 – PGM 44: 085 – PGM 85: 126 – PGM 126:

004 – PGM 4: 045 – PGM 45: 086 – PGM 86: 127 – PGM 127:

Description on page 33 005 – PGM 5: 046 – PGM 46: 087 – PGM 87: 128 – PGM 128:

006 – PGM 6: 047 – PGM 47: 088 – PGM 88: 129 – PGM 129:

007 – PGM 7: 048 – PGM 48: 089 – PGM 89: 130 – PGM 130:

008 – PGM 8: 049 – PGM 49: 090 – PGM 90: 131 – PGM 131:

009 – PGM 9: 050 – PGM 50: 091 – PGM 91: 132 – PGM 132:

010 – PGM 10: 051 – PGM 51: 092 – PGM 92: 133 – PGM 133:

011 – PGM 11: 052 – PGM 52: 093 – PGM 93: 134 – PGM 134:

012 – PGM 12: 053 – PGM 53: 094 – PGM 94: 135 – PGM 135:

013 – PGM 13: 054 – PGM 54: 095 – PGM 95: 136 – PGM 136:

014 – PGM 14: 055 – PGM 55: 096 – PGM 96: 137 – PGM 137:

015 – PGM 15: 056 – PGM 56: 097 – PGM 97: 138 – PGM 138:

016 – PGM 16: 057 – PGM 57: 098 – PGM 98: 139 – PGM 139:

017 – PGM 17: 058 – PGM 58: 099 – PGM 99: 140 – PGM 140:

018 – PGM 18: 059 – PGM 59: 100 – PGM 100: 141 – PGM 141:

019 – PGM 19: 060 – PGM 60: 101 – PGM 101: 142 – PGM 142:

020 – PGM 20: 061 – PGM 61: 102 – PGM 102: 143 – PGM 143:

021 – PGM 21: 062 – PGM 62: 103 – PGM 103: 144 – PGM 144:

022 – PGM 22: 063 – PGM 63: 104 – PGM 104: 145 – PGM 145:

023 – PGM 23: 064 – PGM 64: 105 – PGM 105: 146 – PGM 146:

024 – PGM 24: 065 – PGM 65: 106 – PGM 106: 147 – PGM 147:

025 – PGM 25: 066 – PGM 66: 107 – PGM 107: 148 – PGM 148:

026 – PGM 26: 067 – PGM 67: 108 – PGM 108: 149 – PGM 149:

027 – PGM 27: 068 – PGM 68: 109 – PGM 109: 150 – PGM 150:

028 – PGM 28: 069 – PGM 69: 110 – PGM 110: 151 – PGM 151:

029 – PGM 29: 070 – PGM 70: 111 – PGM 111: 152 – PGM 152:

030 – PGM 30: 071 – PGM 71: 112 – PGM 112: 153 – PGM 153:

031 – PGM 31: 072 – PGM 72: 113 – PGM 113: 154 – PGM 154:

032 – PGM 32: 073 – PGM 73: 114 – PGM 114: 155 – PGM 155:

033 – PGM 33: 074 – PGM 74: 115 – PGM 115: 156 – PGM 156:

034 – PGM 34: 075 – PGM 75: 116 – PGM 116: 157 – PGM 157:

035 – PGM 35: 076 – PGM 76: 117 – PGM 117: 158 – PGM 158:

036 – PGM 36: 077 – PGM 77: 118 – PGM 118: 159 – PGM 159:

037 – PGM 37: 078 – PGM 78: 119 – PGM 119: 160 – PGM 160:

038 – PGM 38: 079 – PGM 79: 120 – PGM 120: 161 – PGM 161:

039 – PGM 39 080 – PGM 80: 121 – PGM 121: 162 – PGM 162:

040 – PGM 40: 081 – PGM 81: 122 – PGM 122: 163 – PGM 163:

041 – PGM 41: 082 – PGM 82: 123 – PGM 123: 164 – PGM 164:

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

[011] PGM Config. Options (4-Digit Decimal) Valid Range: 000-028 Description on page 37

PGM Zone Follower by Zone

(000-128; Default 000)

Prox. Used

(000-095; Default 000)

Command Output

(000-004; Default 000)

Alarm Panel 001 PGM 1

002 PGM 2

003 PGM 3

004 PGM 4

HSM2204 #1 005 PGM 5

006 PGM 6

007 PGM 7

008 PGM 8

HSM2204 #2 009 PGM 9

010 PGM 10

011 PGM 11

012 PGM 12

HSM2204 #3 013 PGM 13

014 PGM 14

015 PGM 15

016 PGM 16

HSM2204 #4 017 PGM 17

018 PGM 18

019 PGM 19

020 PGM 20

HSM2208 #1 037 PGM 37

038 PGM 38

039 PGM 39

040 PGM 40

041 PGM 41

042 PGM 42

043 PGM 43

044 PGM 44

HSM2208 #2 045 PGM 45

046 PGM 46

047 PGM 47

048 PGM 48

049 PGM 49

050 PGM 50

051 PGM 51

052 PGM 52

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

PGM Zone Follower by Zone

(001-128; Default 000)

Prox. Used

(000-095; Default 000)

Command Output

(001-004; Default 000)

HSM2208 #3 053 PGM 53

054 PGM 54

055 PGM 55

056 PGM 56

057 PGM 57

058 PGM 58

059 PGM 59

060 PGM 60

HSM2208 #4 061 PGM 61

062 PGM 62

063 PGM 63

064 PGM 64

065 PGM 65

066 PGM 66

067 PGM 67

068 PGM 68

HSM2208 #5 069 PGM 69

070 PGM 70

071 PGM 71

072 PGM 72

073 PGM 73

074 PGM 74

075 PGM 75

076 PGM 76

HSM2208 #6 077 PGM 77

078 PGM 78

079 PGM 79

080 PGM 80

081 PGM 81

082 PGM 82

083 PGM 83

084 PGM 84

HSM2208 #7 085 PGM 85

086 PGM 86

087 PGM 87

088 PGM 88

089 PGM 89

090 PGM 90

091 PGM 91

092 PGM 92

HSM2208 #8 093 PGM 93

094 PGM 94

095 PGM 95

096 PGM 96

097 PGM 97

098 PGM 98

099 PGM 99

100 PGM 100

HSM2208 #9 101 PGM 101

102 PGM 102

103 PGM 103

104 PGM 104

105 PGM 105

106 PGM 106

107 PGM 107

108 PGM 108

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

PGM Zone Follower by Zone

(001-128; Default 000)

Prox. Used

(000-095; Default 000)

Command Output

(001-004; Default 000)

HSM2208

#10

109 PGM 109

110 PGM 110

111 PGM 111

112 PGM 112

113 PGM 113

114 PGM 114

115 PGM 115

116 PGM 116

HSM2208

#11

117 PGM 117

118 PGM 118

119 PGM 119

120 PGM 120

121 PGM 121

122 PGM 122

123 PGM 123

124 PGM 124

HSM2208

#12

125 PGM 125

126 PGM 126

127 PGM 127

128 PGM 128

129 PGM 129

130 PGM 130

131 PGM 131

132 PGM 132

HSM2208

#13

133 PGM 133

134 PGM 134

135 PGM 135

136 PGM 136

137 PGM 137

138 PGM 138

139 PGM 139

140 PGM 140

HSM2208

#14

141 PGM 141

142 PGM 142

143 PGM 143

144 PGM 144

145 PGM 145

146 PGM 146

147 PGM 147

148 PGM 148

HSM2208

#15

149 PGM 149

150 PGM 150

151 PGM 151

152 PGM 152

153 PGM 153

154 PGM 154

155 PGM 155

156 PGM 156

HSM2208

#16

157 PGM 157

158 PGM 158

159 PGM 159

160 PGM 160

161 PGM 161

162 PGM 162

163 PGM 163

164 PGM 164

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

System Lockout

System Options

[012] System Lockout

(3-Digit Decimal) Keypad Lockout: (Range: 000-255; Default 000)

Keypad Lockout Duration: (Range: 001-255; Default 000)

Description on page 37 Remote Lockout: (Range: 003-255; Default 006)

Remote Lockout Duration: (Range: 001-255; Default 060)

[013] System Options 1

Description on page 37

 1 – NC Loop/EOL

 2 – DEOL/SEOL

 3 – Show All Troubles When Armed

 4 – Tamper/Faults Do Not Show As Open

 5 – Auto-Arm Schedule in [*][6]

 6 – Audible Exit Fault

 7 – Event Buffer Follows Swinger

 8 – Temporal Three Fire Signaling

[014] System Options 2

Description on pg 38

 1 – Bell Squawk

 2 – Bell Duration Auto-Arm

 3 – Bell Squawk on Exit

 4 – Bell Squawk on Entry

 5 – Bell Squawk on Trouble

 6 – Not Used

 7 – Exit Delay Termination

 8 – Fire Bell Continues

[015] System Options 3

Description on page 38

 1 – [F] Key

 2 – [P] Key Annunciation

 3 – Quick Exit

 4 – Quick Arming/Function Key

 5 – Not Used

 6 – Master Code Not User Changeable

 7 – Telephone Line Monitor Enable

 8 – TLM Audible When Armed

[016] System Options 4

Description on pg 38

 1 – AC Trouble Display

 2 – AC Trouble Light Flashes

 3 – Keypad Blanking

 4 – Keypad Blanking Requires

Code

 5 – Keypad Backlighting

 6 – Power Save Mode

 7 – Bypass Display When Armed

 8 – Keypad Tampers Enabled

[017] System Options 5

Description on page 39

 1 – Chime on Opening

 2 – Chime on Closing

 3 – Not Used

 4 – Multi-Hit

 5 – Late to Close

 6 – Daylight Savings Time

 7 – Not Used

 8 – Bell Squawk on Away Arm/Disarm

[018] System Options 6

Description on pg 39

 1 – Test Transmission Exception

 2 – Real-Time Bypass Reporting

 3 – Not Used

 4 – Not Used

 5 – Keypad Buzzer Alarm

 6 – Not Used

 7 – Exit Delay Restart

 8 – AC Fail Trouble Beeps

[019] System Options 7

Description on page 40

 1 – Not Used

 2 – Latching Troubles

 3 – Not Used

 4 – Not Used

 5 – Audible Bus Fault

 6 – Duress Code

 7 – Temperature in Celsius

 8 – Not Used

[020] System Options 8

Description on pg 40

 1 – Not Used

 2 – Not Used

 3 – [*][8] Access While Armed

 4 – Not Used

 5 – Not Used

 6 – Not Used

 7 – Not Used

 8 – Not Used

[021] System Options 9

Description on page 40

 1 – Not Used

 2 – Not Used

 3 – Auto-Arming Bypass

 4 – Not Used

 5 – Not Used

 6 – Not Used

 7 – Not Used

 8 – Audible Exit Delay for Stay Arm

[022] System Options 10

Description on pg 40

 1 – [F] Key Option

 2 – Not Used

 3 – Not Used

 4 – Transmission Counter in

Hours

 5 – Away to Stay Toggle

 6 – Not Used

 7 – Trouble Beeps Are Silent

 8 – Keyswitch Arms in Away

Mode

[023] System Options 11

Description on page 40

 1 – Ready LED Flash for Force Arm

 2 – Not Used

 3 – Not Used

 4 – Access Code Required for [*][1]

 5 – Access Code Required for [*][2]

 6 – Access Code Required for [*][3]

 7 – Access Code Required for [*][4]

 8 – [*][6] Accessibility Option

[024] System Options 12

Description on pg 41

 1– 50Hz AC / 60 Hz AC

 2 – Crystal Timebase

 3 – AC/DC Inhibits Arming

 4 – Tampers Inhibit Arming

 5 – Real Time Clock Option

 6 – Not Used



7 – Not Used

 8 – DLS Disconnect

[025] System Options 13

Description on page 41

 1 – European Dial

 2 – Force Dial

 3 – Not Used

 4 – Not Used

 5 – ID Tone

 6 – Tone Generated-2100Hz

 7 – 1 Hour DLS Window

 8 – FTC Audible Bell

[040] User Authentication

Description on page 42

 1 – User Code or Prox. Tag

 2 – User Code and Prox. Tag

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

[041] Access Code Digits

Description on page 42

 00 – 4-Digit Access Codes

 01 – 6-Digit Access Codes

[042] Event Verification

Description on page 42

01 – Burglary Verified Counter (Default:

002):

03 – Burglary Verification Selection: 001 – Police Code (Default)

002 – Cross Zoning

[151] Partition 1 Auto-Arm/

Disarm

001 – Partition 1 Auto-Arming Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Description on page 42 Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

002 – Partition 1 Auto-Disarm Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

003 – Partition 1 Auto-Disarming Holiday

Schedule:

Holiday 1:  On  Off

Holiday 2:  On  Off

Holiday 3:  On  Off

Holiday 4:  On  Off

(3-digit decimal) 004 – Partition 1 Auto-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):

(000-255 minutes) 005 – Partition 1 Auto-Arming Postpone Timer (Default: 000):

006 – Partition 1 No Activity Arming Timer (Default: 000):

007 – Partition 1 No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer (Default: 001):

[152] Partition 2 Auto-Arm/

Disarm

001 – Partition 2 Auto-Arming Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

002 – Partition 2 Auto-Disarm Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

003 – Partition 2 Auto-Disarming Holiday

Schedule:

Holiday 1:  On  Off

Holiday 2:  On  Off

Holiday 3:  On  Off

Holiday 4:  On  Off

(3-digit decimal) 004 – Partition 2 Auto-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):

(000-255 minutes) 005 – Partition 2 Auto-Arming Postpone Timer (Default: 000):

006 – Partition 2 No Activity Arming Timer (Default: 000):

007 – Partition 2 No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer (Default: 001):

[153] Partition 3 Auto-Arm/

Disarm

001 – Partition 3 Auto-Arming Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Descriptions on page 42 Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

002 – Partition 3 Auto-Disarm Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

003 – Partition 3 Auto-Disarming Holiday

Schedule:

Holiday 1:  On  Off

Holiday 2:  On  Off

Holiday 3:  On  Off

Holiday 4:  On  Off

(3-digit decimal) 004 – Partition 3 Auto-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):

(000-255 minutes) 005 – Partition 3 Auto-Arming Postpone Timer (Default: 000):

006 – Partition 3 No Activity Arming Timer (Default: 000):

007 – Partition 3 No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer (Default: 001):

[154] Partition 4 Auto-Arm/

Disarm

001 – Partition 4 Auto-Arming Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Descriptions on 42 Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

002 – Partition 4 Auto-Disarm Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Tuesday: Saturday:

003 – Partition 4 Auto-Disarming Holiday

Schedule:

Holiday 1:  On  Off

Holiday 2:  On  Off

Holiday 3:  On  Off

Holiday 4:  On  Off

(3-digit decimal) 004 – Partition 4 Auto-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):

(000-255 minutes) 005 – Partition 4 Auto-Arming Postpone Timer (Default: 000):

006 – Partition 4 No Activity Arming Timer (Default: 000):

007 – Partition 4 No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer (Default: 001):

[155] Partition 5 Auto-Arm/

Disarm

001 – Partition 5 Auto-Arming Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Descriptions on 42 Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

002 – Partition 5 Auto-Disarm Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

003 – Partition 5 Auto-Disarming Holiday

Schedule:

Holiday 1:  On  Off

Holiday 2:  On  Off

Holiday 3:  On  Off

Holiday 4:  On  Off

(3-digit decimal) 004 – Partition 5 Auto-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):

(000-255 minutes) 005 – Partition 5 Auto-Arming Postpone Timer (Default: 000):

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

006 – Partition 5 No Activity Arming Timer (Default: 000):

007 – Partition 5 No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer (Default: 001):

[156] Partition 6 Auto-Arm/

Disarm

001 – Partition 6 Auto-Arming Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Descriptions on 42 Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

002 – Partition 6 Auto-Disarm Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

003 – Partition 6 Auto-Disarming Holiday

Schedule:

Holiday 1:  On  Off

Holiday 2:  On  Off

Holiday 3:  On  Off

Holiday 4:  On  Off

(3-digit decimal) 004 – Partition 6 Auto-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):

(000-255 minutes) 005 – Partition 6 Auto-Arming Postpone Timer (Default: 000):

006 – Partition 6 No Activity Arming Timer (Default: 000):

007 – Partition 6 No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer (Default: 001):

[157] Partition 7 Auto-Arm/

Disarm

001 – Partition 7 Auto-Arming Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Descriptions on 42 Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

002 – Partition 7 Auto-Disarm Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

003 – Partition 7 Auto-Disarming Holiday

Schedule:

Holiday 1:  On  Off

Holiday 2:  On  Off

Holiday 3:  On  Off

Holiday 4:  On  Off

(3-digit decimal) 004 – Partition 7 Auto-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):

(000-255 minutes) 005 – Partition 7 Auto-Arming Postpone Timer (Default: 000):

006 – Partition 7 No Activity Arming Timer (Default: 000):

007 – Partition 7 No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer (Default: 001):

[158] Partition 8 Auto-Arm/

Disarm

001 – Partition 8 Auto-Arming Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Descriptions on 42 Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

002 – Partition 8 Auto-Disarm Times:

(4-digit HH:MM)

Default: 9999

24-Hour:

Sunday: Thursday:

Monday: Friday:

Tuesday: Saturday:

Wednesday:

003 – Partition 8 Auto-Disarming Holiday

Schedule:

Holiday 1:  On  Off

Holiday 2:  On  Off

Holiday 3:  On  Off

Holiday 4:  On  Off

(3-digit decimal) 004 – Partition 8 Auto-Arming Pre-Alert (Default: 004):

(000-255 minutes) 005 – Partition 8 Auto-Arming Postpone Timer (Default: 000):

006 – Partition 8 No Activity Arming Timer (Default: 000):

007 – Partition 8 No Activity Arming Pre-Alert Timer (Default: 001):

[200] Partition Mask 001 – Partition 1 to 8 Enable Mask  – Partition 1

 – Partition 2

Descriptions on 42  – Partition 3

 – Partition 4

 – Partition 5

 – Partition 6

 – Partition 7

 – Partition 8

[201]-[208] Partition Zone Assignment (Description on page 43)

[201] Partition 1 Zone Assignment [202] Partition 2 Zone Assignment [203] Partition 3 Zone Assignment

Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

001 – 01-08  001 – 01-08  001 – 01-08 

002 – 09-16  002 – 09-16  002 – 09-16 

003 – 17-24  003 – 17-24  003 – 17-24 

004 – 25-32  004 – 25-32  004 – 25-32 

005 – 33-40  005 – 33-40  005 – 33-40 

006 – 41-48  006 – 41-48  006 – 41-48 

007 – 49-56  007 – 49-56  007 – 49-56 

008 – 57-64  008 – 57-64  008 – 57-64 

009 – 65-72  009 – 65-72  009 – 65-72 

010 – 73-80  010 – 73-80  010 – 73-80 

011 – 81-88  011 – 81-88  011 – 81-88 

012 – 89-96  012 – 89-96  012 – 89-96 

013 – 97-104  013 – 97-104  013 – 97-104 

014 – 105-112  014 – 105-112  014 – 105-112 

015 – 113-120  015 – 113-120  015 – 113-120 

016 – 121-128  016 – 121-128  016 – 121-128 

Section 6: Programming Worksheets

[204] Partition 4 Zone Assignment [205] Partition 5 Zone Assignment [206] Partition 6 Zone Assignment

Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

001 – 01-08  001 – 01-08  001 – 01-08 